JP7350250B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that can change setting values according to settings related to a game (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 6-238056

However, in conventional gaming machines, there is room for improvement in countermeasures against fraud.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to notify fraudsters against gaming machines .

In a typical form of the present invention, in a gaming machine equipped with a control means capable of executing a game and generating a special gaming state and a specific gaming state advantageous to a player, information regarding the game is stored, and when a power outage occurs The storage means includes a storage area that is the target of the validity determination of the stored information, and a storage area that is the target of the validity determination of the stored information. and a storage area in which the control means starts outputting a signal upon the occurrence of the special gaming state, and is capable of outputting the signal until the specific gaming state after the special gaming state ends; In response to multiple events that may occur in the gaming machine, it is possible to output a security signal to notify the occurrence of the event , and even if the power is cut off during the special gaming state or the specific gaming state, the power is restored. When the validity determination is made, the validity of the information stored in the storage area that is the target of the validity determination is determined without performing the validity determination of the information stored in the storage area that is not the target of the validity determination, and the If the result of the validity determination is abnormal, the security signal for notifying the abnormality is output, and the signal is not output.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to notify of fraud against a gaming machine .

It is a perspective view of the gaming machine seen from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a production control system of a gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the gaming machine is powered on. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of the main processing of game control. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half of the main processing of game control. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting change/confirmation process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display example of a performance display device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure start opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information determination processing (second half). It is a flowchart showing the procedure of a look-ahead jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (first half). It is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (second half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of fall lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot flag 1 setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit determination processing. This is a table illustrating jackpot probability, small hit probability, and fall probability. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. This is a table illustrating the distribution of types of jackpots. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of time reduction variation number update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter part of the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of fanfare/interval processing (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of fanfare/interval processing (second half). It is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 1 jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot end setting process 3. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during a small win fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the production control device. 7 is a flowchart showing received command check processing. 3 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart showing one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart showing prefetch symbol type command processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating prefetch variable command processing. It is a flowchart showing symbol-related command processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hit system command process. FIG. 7 is a time chart of setting suggestion effects according to the first embodiment. FIG. It is a table showing an example of the reliability of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is an example of a table showing the relationship between setting suggestion effects and jackpots according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a screen transition diagram of setting suggestion production according to the first embodiment. It is a time chart of the 1st modification of setting suggestion production concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the first modification of the setting suggestion production according to the first embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the first modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a time chart of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (second half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of another setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a screen transition diagram illustrating another example of another setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a table showing the correspondence between work setting values, display probability setting values (setting examples 1, 2, 3, 4), and production control information of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of display probability setting values of setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of display probability setting values of setting example 3 or setting example 4 of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a first modification example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a second modification example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a third modification example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a fourth modification example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a fifth modification example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. 12 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of one-shot command processing according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of hole/player setting mode processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board in a setting change state according to the third embodiment. It is another example of the front view of the game board in the setting change state according to the third embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. in the special game state of normal operation according to the fourth embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when a power outage occurs during the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment and normal recovery is made when the power is restored. It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when a power failure occurs during the special game state according to the fourth embodiment and a memory abnormality occurs when the power is restored. It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when a power outage occurs during the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal, and the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when a power outage occurs during the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal, and the state is shifted to the setting change state. A timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when a power outage occurs during the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal when the power is restored, the setting change state is entered, and then the power is turned off. It is.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. Note that in the description of the gaming machine, front, rear, left, and right refer to the directions seen from the player during the game.

[Overview of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge so as to be rotatable in opening and closing. The opening/closing frame includes a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Furthermore, by opening the front frame 12 while the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) etc. arranged on the back side of the game board 30. I can do it.

Various frame constituent members are arranged at the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

At the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, there is a decorative device 1 that can produce light emission depending on the game state.
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are disposed at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the bottom of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is disposed at the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and at the lower right corner of the front frame 12. These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b are for emitting sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, etc.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protrusion unit 13 is provided that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes toward the front (towards the player). Outstanding unit 1
Reference numeral 3 denotes an effect device that performs light emitting effects and the like in accordance with the progress of the game. Outstanding appearance unit 13
The lighting member disposed inside the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4) also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper tray unit having an upper tray 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed into a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball firing device (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a production operation device that accepts input operations from players, a ball rental operation device that accepts input operations from players, and a decoration device 22 that performs light emission production etc. according to the game state. .

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated into the production button 25,
It is provided in the upper center of the upper tray unit for easy operation by the player.

By the player operating the performance operation device, it is possible to perform a performance in which the player's operation intervenes in a special figure fluctuation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select a performance pattern (performance mode), or to execute a preview performance that foretells in advance the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Incidentally, the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Furthermore, the effect pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being executed, but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the variable display game is not being executed.

Note that the game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state occurs. In addition, special gaming states include, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state, a state where the probability of a special result (e.g. jackpot) is high in a variable display game (variable probability state, variable probability state), jackpot state (
A special game state) and a small win game state (a small win state).

Here, the variable probability states (specific gaming states) include those that continue until the next jackpot occurs (loop type), those that continue until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number-of-time type, ST), and There is a type of lottery that continues until you win a lottery with a predetermined probability (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate a variable probability state may be determined by random numbers of jackpot symbols, and the variable probability state may always be generated when a jackpot occurs, or a winning device with a specific area may be provided to specify A variable probability state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

The ball rental operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball rental operation device has a ball rental button 27 and a return button 28.
and a balance display section 26. The ball rental button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and the return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. This button is operated by the player. The balance display section 26 is a display area where the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 houses lighting members such as LEDs inside, and is a device that performs lighting effects depending on the game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper tray unit. The lighting member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit, etc., and at the bottom of the front frame 12, there is an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launcher (not shown), and a handle capable of storing game balls. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operating handle 24, the ball firing device fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball fired from the ball firing device is set to become faster as the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball firing device has the force (speed) at which the game ball is fired into the game area.
The firing force can be changed in accordance with the operation of the operating handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be fired in various firing modes with different firing forces. The firing mode includes left-handed hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32, and right-handed hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the gaming area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball hole 23a that vertically passes through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation part 23b for opening and closing the ball hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation part 23b to open the ball removal hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removal hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat game board main body 3 that serves as a mounting base for various components.
Equipped with 0a. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin.
A gaming area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided in front of the game area. The gaming machine 10 is
It is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the direction of the game balls flowing down, and the fired game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached that forms a window section that serves as a display area for a variable display game. Behind the window formed in the center case 40 is a production display device (variable display device) that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a variable manner (variable display).
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the displayed content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to one equipped with a liquid crystal display, and may be equipped with a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and each variable display area displays identification information (special symbols) and characters that produce a variable display game. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a game ball flowing down the game area 32.
An inlet 40a for guiding the ball into the warp passage 40e, and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball that has passed through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage part 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37,
The game ball rolling on the stage part 40b is likely to win a prize in the starting prize opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37.

An upper presentation unit 40c and a side presentation unit 40d are provided at the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board presentation device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the gaming area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (common symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the regular figure starting gate 34 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the regular figure starting gate 34, the regular figure variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the gaming area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the gaming area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40. Winning of game balls to these general winning holes 35 is performed using a winning hole switch (SW) provided in the general winning hole 35.
) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 that provides starting conditions for the special figure variable display game. Center case 40
In the gaming area 32 on the right side of the page, below the normal figure starting gate 34 is a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessory, general electricity) equipped with a second starting winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area). is provided. The normal variable prize winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts into a state where game balls can easily flow in by sliding from the front to the back side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37.
When the game ball wins in the starting winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. It should be noted that it is easier for a game ball to win in the starting prize opening 36 when the ball is hit to the left, and it is easier to win a game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 when the ball is hit to the right.

The movable member 37b is a sliding opening/closing type normal electric accessory, and is operated via the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state (an easy winning state that is advantageous for the player) in which game balls easily flow into the normal variable winning device 37.

In addition, the movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation display game or making the winning probability of the general pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, and the normal game state. By making the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs, a time-saving state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. In addition, the definite variable state (
(excluding the latent and probable variable state), the time-saving state (general power support state) occurs overlappingly.

In the gaming area 32 to the right of the starting winning opening 36, there is a lower big winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7).
A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) is provided which has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that opens the lower big winning hole by retracting from the front to the back side to open the big winning hole. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the big winning hole from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and By facilitating the flow of game balls into the grand prize opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, in the lower large winning hole, a lower large winning hole switch 38a (count switch) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning hole. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 makes it easier for game balls to win when the ball is hit to the right.

In the gaming area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37, there is a large winning opening solenoid 39b (Fig.
A second special variable prize winning device 39 is provided which has an opening/closing door 39c that opens the top prize winning opening by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the right side by the second special variable prize winning device 39. Second special variable prize winning device 39
Converts the grand prize opening from a closed state (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and allows the game ball to enter the grand prize opening. By facilitating the influx of players, a predetermined gaming value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, in the grand prize opening, an upper large winning a prize opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the said grand prize opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 makes it easier for game balls to win when the ball is hit to the right. Moreover, the lower large winning a prize opening switch 38a and the upper large winning a prize opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as the large winning a prize opening switch 43.

Inside the second special variable winning device 39, a specific area 86 (so-called V winning hole) is provided. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning hole), the probability change state after the jackpot ends (
High probability state, specific game state) is confirmed. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only in the case of a variable jackpot, so that the game ball can easily pass through. In addition, the game control device 100 can detect the passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described below), etc., and when the V winning is detected, the state changes to the variable probability state after the jackpot ends. At the same time, information indicating that there is a V winning prize (such as a specific area passing command) is transmitted to the production control device 300, which will be described later. Then, the production control device 300 displays the V winning prize on the display device 4.
1 etc. can be notified.

General winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 38
, 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 according to the type of winning hole. Further, in the lower gaming area 32, there is provided an exit opening 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like. In addition, in the general winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, special variable winning device 38, 39 and their vicinity, there are LEDs that can emit light when a game ball wins a prize (a board decoration device described below). 46) are arranged.

In addition, outside the gaming area 32 and at the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, special pattern variation display games (special pattern 1 variation display game, special pattern 2 variation display game) and regular pattern variation display games are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming status.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display section 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) for the variable display game, which is composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), etc. The display section 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), the variable display section 53 for the normal figure variable display game (normal figure indicator, lamps D8, D10, D18), and the start (on hold) of each variable display game. Memory display unit for informing the number of stored numbers (Special drawing 1 holding display 54, Special drawing 2 holding display 55, Regular drawing holding display 56
) and has. The special figure 1 reservation display 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12.
The special figure 2 reservation display 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. General figure hold display 56
is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display section 57 (a first game state indicator, a lamp) that informs that the player is playing right-handed (when he should play right-handed) or left-handed (normally playing). D7),
When the time saving state occurs, the second gaming state display section 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the jackpot probability state changes to the high probability state. The third game state display section 59 (third game state display, probability state display section, lamp D9) displays the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the number of times the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed). A round display section 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, the center segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such segment type display parts.
It may be composed of an aggregate of multiple LEDs, and when performing a variable display, all LEDs provided as an indicator can be turned on or off (all LEDs blink at the same time), or cycled on (one of them). The light may be turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined intervals starting from one LED, or may be turned on and off (flashing) or cycled by a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs. Also on the regular figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the regular map display 53 and the special map 1 display 5
1. Like the special figure 2 display 52, it can be configured as appropriate.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform a variable display (flashing) that repeats lighting and extinguishing as a symbol (fourth special symbol to be described later), and a lamp display unit 2 (LED) that performs a variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting and extinguishing as a symbol (fourth special symbol to be described later), and a lamp display unit 2 (LED) for starting each special symbol variable display game. (Pending) It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for informing the number of memories. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by a production control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. While the fluctuation times of the variable displays on the special figure 1 display 51, special figure 2 display 52, and regular figure display 53 of the collective display device 50 are measured by the game control device 100, the lamps of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by a production control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 holding LED 1, special drawing 1 holding LED 2) display the number of special drawings 1 holding (first starting memory number) by a combination of an off state, a lighting state, and a blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special map 2 holding LED 1, special drawing 2 holding LED 2) display the number of special drawings 2 holding (second starting memory number) depending on the combination of off state, lighting state, and blinking state. do. The lamp display section 3-6 stops displaying the pending number when a jackpot occurs, but in cases other than the jackpot state (including when a reach described below is occurring on the display device 41), the lamp display section 3-6 stops displaying the pending number. conduct.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the regular pattern fluctuation display game, and the special pattern fluctuation display game will be explained.

In the game machine 10, a game is played by firing a game ball toward the game area 32 from a ball firing device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing its rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. placed at various places in the game area 32, and passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, the general prize opening 35, and the starting prize opening. 36, the winnings are won in the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, or they flow into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and are discharged from the gaming area 32. When a game ball wins in the general winning hole 35, the starting winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning hole enters the payout device. The liquid is discharged to the upper tray 21 through the medium.

The regular figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) that detects a game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the regular figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the regular figure fluctuation display game is executed based on the judgment result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

Conditions in which the general pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general pattern fluctuation display game is already being played and the relevant general pattern fluctuation display game has not finished, or when the result of the general pattern fluctuation display game is a win and it is normal. When the variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the stored number is added (+1).

The normal pattern starting memory stores a random number value for determining the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and when this random number value for winning judgment matches the judgment value, the corresponding normal pattern fluctuation display is When the game is won, a specific result pattern (specific result) is derived.

The ordinary figure fluctuation display game is executed on the ordinary figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure indicator 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit when lit as ordinary identification information (ordinary figure) and indicates a miss when it is turned off. By blinking this LED, it is possible to detect fluctuations in the ordinary identification information. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal pattern random number value extracted at the time of passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time, by driving the normal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is changed to the open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball is transferred to the normal variable winning device 37. Prizes are accepted.

The winning of the game ball into the starting winning hole 36 and the winning into the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting hole 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting hole 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that won the starting winning hole 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game,
The winning balls are stored up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the game balls that win in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as starting winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored up to a predetermined upper limit number.

At the time of detecting the starting prize ball of the special figure fluctuation display game, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, each fluctuation pattern random number, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure starting winning memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times at most). The number of stored special drawing starting winnings is displayed on the special drawing 1 holding display 54 and special drawing 2 holding display 55 for informing the starting winning number of the batch display device 50, and also on the display device 4.
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting winning hole 36 or the first starting memory. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the special figure 2 on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.
Run a variable display game.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), identification information ( This is done by displaying a predetermined result mode in a fixed manner after variably displaying special symbols (special symbols, special symbols).

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous variation machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously (both) independently of each other. When a jackpot occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game (there is no small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game in this embodiment), the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a winning result. do. When a jackpot occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the currently running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result.

When a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game in progress is interrupted. In this case, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the special figure 1 game processing timer is interrupted and the special figure 1
The derivation of the result of the variable display game (display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the stopped symbol number) is postponed, and the suspended special symbol 1 variable display game can be resumed after the small winning operation related to the special symbol 2 variable display game is completed. .

In addition, in the normal game state, if a game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 by hitting right, the special figure 2 variable display game will start changing, but basically it will fluctuate for a long time (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes). Therefore, if a jackpot occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game during this period, it will be forcibly missed and the game will be stopped.

In addition, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to each special figure variable display game.

In the decorative special symbol variable display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information) consisting of the numbers and the like described above are displayed on the left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ), the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined period of time, and the result of the special symbol fluctuating display game is displayed. Furthermore, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters to increase interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variable display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), a fourth special symbol is displayed on the lamp display sections 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 by repeating the lighting display and the lighting display (blinking). fluctuate. The variable display on the lamp display sections 1 and 2 stops after a predetermined period of time from the start, with the light turned off in the case of a loss, and with the light turned on in the case of a jackpot or small win.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or they may be executed on the same display. It may also be executed on the device or display area. Further, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may both be in an execution state (a state in which they are being executed) at the same time.

When a game ball enters the starting winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number at the time of winning detection is the jackpot value), as a result of the special figure variable display game. A specific result pattern (special result pattern) is derived depending on the displayed symbol, and a jackpot state (
special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are operated by the big winning opening solenoids (38b, 39b) (
(See FIG. 3), the big prize opening is converted from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the big prize opening provided in the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is wide open for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time the player has the privilege of being able to win many game balls. Granted.

If a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (if the jackpot random number at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), the special figure variable display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, resulting in a small win state. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine the small hit, but the small win value (small hit judgment value) is different from the jackpot value (jackpot judgment value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 operate the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (Fig.
By energizing the (see), the big prize opening is converted from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined short time.
In addition, the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small winning state (small winning gaming state) than in the jackpot state (special gaming state), so in the small winning state the player can win more games than in the jackpot state. The value (number of pitches acquired) is low. In addition, in both the small winning state and the jackpot state, the big winning opening is in the open state, but the jackpot state may be called the first special gaming state, and the small winning state may be called the second special gaming state.

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be explained.

A jackpot is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small hit is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device is activated when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol fluctuation display game (stop display of the jackpot symbol).When the condition device is activated, for example, a jackpot condition occurs and a special electric accessory is activated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is set. The fact that the conditional device is not activated means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. In addition,"
The "condition device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Furthermore, "condition device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term that has the meaning of

Specifically, in the case of a jackpot, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the jackpot flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the small winning flag. will be released.

In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or may be configured as the same display, but each special figure fluctuation display game is not executed at the same time. It is set as follows.

In addition, in the following explanation, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variable display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a. The starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch (38a, 39a) in the normal variable winning device 37 are equipped with a magnetic detection coil, and when a metal comes close to the coil, a magnetic field is generated. Non-contact magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used that detect game balls using changing phenomena. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (gaming frame) 12 etc. Microswitches with standard contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the gaming control system of the gaming machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0 (main board), the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that centrally controls the game, and includes a CPU section having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130.

The CPU section 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator and generates a reference clock for a CPU operating clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply unit 400 includes a normal power supply section 410 that includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V or DC 5V from a DC 32V voltage, and the like. , gaming microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply section 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 in the event of a power outage, and a power outage monitoring circuit, and provides control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage. The control signal generating section 430 generates and outputs a control signal generating section 430 and the like.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrated with the gaming control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when changing the model, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 43 are installed on a power supply device 400 or a board separate from the main board, as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, it is possible to exclude it from replacement and reduce costs.

The backup power supply section 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is provided by the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is maintained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops to 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage, changes the power outage monitoring signal, and generates a reset signal after a predetermined time. Output. Also, when the power is turned on or when a power failure is recovered, a reset signal is output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the gaming control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated.
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is read from the gaming microcontroller 1.
11 is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotational operation or the like, thereby making it possible to change probability setting values (setting values) according to settings regarding game conditions (games). Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as the jackpot probability or the small winning probability, but other game conditions (such as effects) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are
A setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing settings related to gaming conditions (probability setting values) is constituted. Note that another switch instead of the RAM initialization switch 112 may also serve as the setting value change switch, or a unique setting value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10, so that they are placed in a position where they cannot be operated (a position where they cannot be accessed) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (power outage recovery, power restoration), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the on/off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) where changes can be made and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) where probability setting values can be confirmed.

In this embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in six stages, for example, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the most disadvantageous setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area changes to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ Setting value 1 (Setting 2, Probability setting value 2) → Setting value 2 (Setting 3, Probability setting value 3) → Setting value 3 (
Setting 4, probability setting 4) → Setting 4 (setting 5, probability setting 5) → Setting 5 (setting 6, probability setting 6) → Setting 0 (setting 1) → Setting 1 (setting 2) → It will be changed as follows. In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For convenience of explanation, work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to probability setting values 1 to 6, respectively, during the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting values and probability setting values are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning them within a numerical range (ie, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (setting the work setting value and the probability setting value to the same numerical value).

Note that the probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch). Further, the probability setting value is not limited to six levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected working setting value of 0 to 5 is displayed by a performance display device 152 that is, for example, a 4-digit, 7-segment type (8-segment type if dot Dp is included) display. etc. will be displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and an RA that can be read and written at any time.
M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area for the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control, and stores information related to games (gaming information), and can retain the stored information even if a power outage occurs. It becomes a storage storage means that can hold data. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the performance, the presence or absence of a ready-to-reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table used by the CPU 111a to determine a fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored in the starting memory. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a loss fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second-half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as a second-half fluctuation group table and second-half fluctuation pattern selection table), and tables for determining the fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state. It includes tables (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining first half variation patterns, which are patterns.

Here, reach (ready-to-reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and the multiple display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when a special result mode occurs (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed,
This is a display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode have not been met. This refers to the display mode that does not exist. For example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result aspect is complete (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Furthermore, the reach state is the display state at the point when the display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, and is determined before the display results are derived and displayed. A display state in which at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, a decorative special figure variable display game displayed on a display device in response to a special figure variable display game may vary a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is to be stopped in the left, right, and middle order to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas will display a state where the conditions for the special result mode are met (for example, The state in which the variable display stops with the same identification information is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meet the conditions for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information (However, special result modes are excluded) may be set as a ready-to-win state, and the remaining variable display area may be displayed in a variable manner from the ready-to-reach state.

The reach state includes multiple reach performances, and the systems (types) of reach performances with different possibilities (different expectations) of deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode) are normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP
2 Reach), Special 3 Reach (SP3 Reach), and Premier Reach.
Note that the expectation level (expected value) of a jackpot increases in the following order: No reach < Normal reach < Special 1 reach < Special 2 reach < Special 3 reach < Premier reach. Moreover, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special symbol variable display game (when it becomes a jackpot). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the result is a loss). Therefore, a state in which a ready-to-win state occurs is a state in which there is a high possibility of a jackpot compared to a case in which a ready-to-reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300, generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and display device, and operates the game machine. Controls the entire 10. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in the special figure fluctuation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol for determining a small win symbol. A random number generation circuit for generating pattern random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining fluctuation patterns in special symbol fluctuation display games (including execution time of fluctuation display games in various reach and non-reach fluctuation displays); , a clock generator that generates a clock that provides a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111a uses the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the memory is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111a stores the game results (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables. Here, CPU11
1a constitutes a fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit according to the prize ball payout command (command and data) from the game control device 100, and releases the prize balls. Performs control to pay out.
Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600 to pay out rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the regular figure starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting prize opening 36. Switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), winning port switch 35a of the general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38
, 39 big winning opening switch 43 (lower big winning opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a
), and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which inputs a negative logic signal such as 0V to 5V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V to 5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to a specific area switch 72, a remaining ball outlet switch 73, and an out ball detection switch 74. Specific area switch 72
detects passage of the game ball (V winning hole) to the specific area 86 (V winning hole). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects the game balls that have passed through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging the game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game balls passing through the out port 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been fired into the game area and have finished playing.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, winning port switch 35a, and large winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. .

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in a sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , detection signals from the specific area switch 72 , remaining ball outlet switch 73 , or out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126 .

The second input port 123 also receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10, and a detection signal for detecting a glass frame opening provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10. A vibration sensor 6 that detects a switch 63, a signal from a front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and vibrations of the gaming machine 10.
A signal from 5 is input.

Further, the second input port 123 takes in a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the gaming control device 100 to a test shooting test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12V is supplied to the proximity I/F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is transmitted to the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

The input unit 120 also includes a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow signal. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
A first input port 122 is provided for taking in signals from the game computer 12 and supplying them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via a data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (that it is full). The frame radio wave fraud signal is a signal that is output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting radio waves, and the payout busy signal indicates whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands. This is a signal indicating whether or not.

In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111, etc., and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has the function of removing noise from.
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken in to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is also input directly to the output section 13.
0 ports. In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the sight-fire test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the sight-fire test device is turned off. It is configured as follows.

Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RST can be output to the sight test equipment via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RST is applied to each port 122, 123 of the input section 120.
, 124. The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent system malfunction. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the performance control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication in which signals cannot be input from the production control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 and sends data to inform a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of special symbol information of a variable display game, a signal indicating a jackpot probability state, etc. via a relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine that is an actual machine (mass-produced and sold product) installed in a game parlor. Note that the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting port switch, outputted from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information so that, for example, the gaming machine can control the gaming. An error signal indicating that this is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test equipment via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

Note that the relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the sight test equipment, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without going through the buffer. There is. The gaming microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE outputted from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by the signal CE are supplied to the sight test equipment.

The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (normal electric solenoid) 37c that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) that opens the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and outputting opening/closing data of the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever and opens the specific area 86. Two output ports 134 are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50; Turn on/off the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

The output unit 130 also outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to an external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is equipped with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game parlor (an information collection terminal, a game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can transmit information regarding the game machine 10 to the outside. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a general voltage solenoid 37 outputted from the second output port 134.
The first driver (drive circuit) 138a receives the opening/closing data signals of the big prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b, etc. and generates and outputs the solenoid drive signal, and the current supply for the collective display device 50 is output from the third output port 135. A second driver 138b outputs an on/off drive signal for the side segment line, and a third driver outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. 138c, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In addition, the batch display device 50
DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line. The third driver 138c that drives the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data with a current, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via the segment line, thereby achieving a dynamic drive system. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are turned on. a fourth outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal 71;
The driver 138d is supplied with DC 12V in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. In addition, the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the gaming control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured to enable mutual communication between the gaming microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 500 so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication. Note that such data transmission and reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111, similar to a normal general-purpose microprocessor, so ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code, etc.) output from the second output port 134, and displays a performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 is provided. In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type if dots Dp is included) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may also be provided at other locations. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, an accessory ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of balls ejected.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls)
This is the total of the number of game balls that passed through the winning opening (number of winnings) and the number of gaming balls that passed through the out opening 30b. The number of ejected balls is counted by the signal of the out ball detection switch 74, etc.
It can be obtained by In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), and a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2).
), and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (big winning opening).

The ball output rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of balls ejected (or number of balls fired), and (
Calculated as: number of pitches acquired ÷ number of pitches released) x 100 (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of balls acquired (total number of prize balls) per 100 balls ejected.

For example, the accessory ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering the winning slot in a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present), during the jackpot state. It is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by accessory) obtained by entering the big prize opening (= so-called continuous prize winning ratio). In addition, the accessory ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (in the jackpot state and in the small win state) obtained by entering the big winning hole out of the total number of winning balls (= big winning hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= commonly used so-called accessory ratio (total accessory ratio) )) is fine.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (subboard) will be explained using FIG. 4. Figure 4
1 is a block diagram of the production control system of the gaming machine 10. FIG.

The production control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, uses an amusement chip (IC).
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 that controls the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (Programmable Read Only Memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe memory that can retain memory contents even when power is not supplied during a power outage.
The RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.). Note that a RAM providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the content of the performance, instructs the VDP 312 to output video content, and controls the sound source LSI 314.
It performs processing such as instructing the playback of sounds, lighting decorative lamps, controlling the drive of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read out from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYN is sent from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30.
C. A synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
The main control microcomputer 311 receives interrupt signals INT0 to INT0 to notify processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal to indicate that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The production control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The production control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is outputted from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the production control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I/F3
31, receive the decoration special figure reservation number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 as a production control command signal (production command). . The gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The production control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided therein, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40)
A board performance movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling movable accessories (such as movable accessories that enhance the performance effect in cooperation with the performance display). Note that the board decoration device 46 includes the aforementioned lamp display device 8.
May contain 0.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the production button 25, and a motor in the board production device 44. A function that detects the on/off state of the performance accessories switch 47 (performance motor switch) that detects the initial position etc. and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume adjustment switch provided in the performance control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of the switch 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply section 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by it, 32V DC to drive the motor and solenoids, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, 12V DC to drive the motor and LEDs, DC5 which becomes the power supply voltage of command I/F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker.

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- A DC converter is provided in the production control device 300. In addition, DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), sound source LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the performance control device 300 includes a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When N45 is connected and the production control device 300 is powered on, the cooling FAN 45 is driven.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be explained. Game control device 1
The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of No. 00 extracts a random value for determining the hit of a common figure based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the common figure starting gate 34, and stores it in the ROM 111b. It compares it with the judgment value given and judges whether the game is successful or not.

Then, a common symbol variation display game is displayed on the common symbol display device, in which the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopped. If the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general figure display, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined period of time (for example, (0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result mode of the loss on the normal figure display.

In addition, the starting prize (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable display game is determined based on the starting memory. The random number value is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111b to judge whether the special figure 1 variable display game is a hit or a miss.

In addition, a starting memory is stored based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on the starting memory, a random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is stored. is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit or a miss.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (performance control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game to the production control device 300. Then, a special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, in which the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopped. That is, the game control device 100 is a game control means that controls the progress of the variable display game based on winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning winning device 37). to do.

In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game. Furthermore, the performance control device 300 performs processing such as setting the performance state, outputting sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs, etc. based on the control signal from the game control device 100.
That is, the performance control device 300 constitutes a performance control means that controls the performance related to games (variable display games, etc.).

Then, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a win, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. let In the process of generating a special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened by the big winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to enable the game balls to flow into the big winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the grand prize opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the grand prize opening. One round (R) is defined as opening the big prize opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15, 11, or 2 times) (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a big winning opening/closing control means that controls opening/closing of the big winning opening when the stop result mode becomes a special result mode. Moreover, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result mode of the loss on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result aspect of the special symbol fluctuation display game. The high probability state (variable probability state) is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special symbol fluctuation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if a high probability state is achieved based on the result of either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game Both become high probability states.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result aspect of the special symbol fluctuation display game. In the time saving state, the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be in the time saving operation state, and the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be in a time saving operation state. Since the open time is controlled to be substantially increased, it becomes a general power support state. In addition, even in a high probability state (normal probability variable state) other than the latent probability variable state, the power supply support is executed by redundantly switching to the time saving state.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time)
It is possible to shorten the time by making the second variable display time shorter than the normal first variable display time (for example, 10000 msec becomes 1000 msec). In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time (special figure variation time) of the special figure variation display game is also shortened than usual, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the general pattern fluctuation display game is set to the first
A second stop time (for example, 704 msec) that is shorter than the stop time (for example, 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that

In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened due to a winning result in the general figure fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time in the normal state (for example, 100 msec). It is possible to control the second open time to be longer (for example, 1352 msec) than the second open time.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variable winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal power is opened) is greater than the first number of times it is opened (for example, two times) for one winning result of the general figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (for example, 4 times). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to make the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the short time state, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is brought into the open state by changing one or more of the normal figure fluctuation time, the normal figure stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power open time, and the common figure probability. Allow more time to convert than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variable display game per unit time can be increased compared to the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states in which different things are changed. In addition, in the normal operating state, the movable member 3
7b may be set not to be opened (normal pattern probability is 0). Furthermore, when a win occurs, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities for the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (power restored). As described above, depending on the on/off states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, there are four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

First, when the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, the setting variable state (setting change state) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed is set.
(see A1027-A1036 in FIG. 6B and FIG. 8).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, a transition is made to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (Fig. 6B, A1031-A1036 and FIG. 8).

Also, when the power is turned on, although the setting key switch 93 is off, the RAM initialization switch 11
2 is turned on, it moves to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) and R
AM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) is executed and the RAM 111c is initialized (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 6B).

When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the device shifts to a normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) and is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Control of a gaming machine that plays such a game will be explained below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be explained. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main processing shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, and the main processing shown in FIG.
It consists of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. That is, the gaming control program corresponding to the control processing of the gaming microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main processing, and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. .

[Main processing (gaming control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the gaming control device 100. The main processing starts when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the gaming control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 6A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process to prohibit interrupts (A1001). Furthermore, stack pointer setting processing is executed to set a stack pointer which is the start address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Next, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and firing of game balls is prohibited. After that, the gaming control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value to the power supply delay timer, the game control device 1 serves as the main control means.
A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from 00 starts normally.
seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the gaming control device 100 starts up first and sends a command to the sub-control device before the sub-control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up, the sub-control device can avoid missing commands. That is, when the game control device 100 turns on the power, it delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and activates the slave control devices (payout control device 200, production control device 3).
00, etc.) serves as a standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation.

Furthermore, the power supply delay timer is timed using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (such as a RAM area or register that is not subject to validity determination). As a result, when calculating check data such as checksum of the RAM area, some R
Since it is not necessary to perform calculations excluding the AM region, it is possible to prevent complicated control at power-on.

Note that by reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operations of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated or the power turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the standby time elapses. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it is possible to avoid a situation where the settings key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 operations performed at power-on are not accepted, without having to perform such troublesome operations. It can be prevented.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the gaming control device 100 executes a process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time (A1008 to A1008).
1010).

When the power outage monitoring process is started, the gaming control device 100 first determines whether a power outage has occurred by reading the power outage monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus. (A1008). If a power outage has occurred (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the gaming machine waits until the power is cut off.

The gaming control device 100, if a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N")
, updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009), and determines whether the timer value is 0 (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power outage monitoring means that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power outage that occurs during a period in which the startup of the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents from the previous power cut are still retained, so backup processing will be performed in the event of a power outage. There's no need. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the timer value is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100
), that is, when the standby time has ended, access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (no output state). ) (A1012).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (A1013 ).

Furthermore, here, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initialized. The gaming control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting into the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of digits to be used for the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the gaming control device 100 generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
(A1014). Note that the CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator within the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113.
It is provided with a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for U111a and a signal CTC that provides a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to a random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 reads the RAM (RAM 111c here) indicating an abnormality.
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, a flag assuming an abnormality is set in a predetermined register.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the value of the power failure test area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data (A1016). And if it is normal (A101
6), it is determined whether the value of the power failure test area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, if the value of the power outage inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a gaming control work area) in the RWM. A calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1019). If the checksums match (A1019 result is "Y"), the RAM is normal, and the RAM indicates a RAM error.
Clear the abnormality flag (A1020). Thereafter, the process moves to step A1021.

In addition, the gaming control device 100 determines that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), or if the check sums do not match. (the result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 includes a setting key switch 93 and a RAM initialization switch 112.
It is determined whether both switches are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 shifts to the setting variable state (setting change mode) and executes the process of changing probability settings in steps A1027-A1037. .

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is “N”), the gaming control device 100
111c) is set (A102).
2). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), step A103
1-A1037 process during probability setting confirmation (in setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) in steps A1041-1044, or step A1
041, A1045, and A1046, the normal power-on processing (power restoration time) is executed.

When the probability setting changing flag is set, the gaming control device 100 executes (A1023)
The result is "Y"), a main abnormality error notification command is sent to the production control device 300 to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) (A1024)
. The production control device 300 that received the main abnormal error notification command is the game control device 10
Notify that 0 abnormalities have occurred.

Next, the game control device 100 displays the 7-segment display data (“E1” in FIG. 9(C)) when the game is stopped.
" error display data) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 for display on the performance display device 152 (A1025). Then, on-data of a security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 to notify an external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collection terminal, etc.) of an abnormality (A1026). Here, even if the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the jackpot signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in an off state. Thereafter, repeat the processing of steps A1025 and A1026, wait, and perform the setting change operations (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 1) again.
12) and wait for the power to be turned on. Note that while the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated and the process is on standby, interrupts remain prohibited (A1001), and the timer interrupt processing that can execute the special map 1 and 2 game processing and the general map game processing is performed. (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, so the games (special pattern fluctuation display game, regular pattern fluctuation display game) cannot be performed.

In this way, the settings change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
If the probability setting changing flag is set even though both of the on operations (on operations) have not been executed, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and the processes A1024 to A1026 are executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been performed. be.

On the other hand, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102
2 result is "Y"), a main abnormality error notification command is sent to the production control device 300 to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) (A1024), and the 7-segment when the game is stopped The display data (the error display data of "E1" in FIG. 9(C)) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and the ON data of the security signal is output to the external device in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality. It is output to the information terminal 71 (A1026). Note that, as described above, even if information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the jackpot signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in an off state. Then step A10
25 and A1026 are repeated and the process waits.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (in the setting variable state). First, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). If the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is “Y”)
), it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct or not, so clear the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c and set it to the initial value (for example, the lowest setting value "1") (A1028 ), set the probability setting changing flag to indicate that the probability setting is being changed (
A1029). If the RAM error flag is not set (A1027 result is “N
"), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, a command for changing the probability setting is sent to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1
030), the process moves to step A1034. In addition, the production control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being changed on the display device 41 or the like.

In the gaming control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), and the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, and the process during probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) starts, and the probability A probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command for checking the probability setting is sent to the production control device 30.
0 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process moves to step A1034. In addition, the production control device 300 which received the command for changing the probability setting notifies on the display device 41 etc. that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the gaming control device 100 executes the processes from step A1034 to A1040 as a common process during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation.

The gaming control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output a security signal during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (A1034). Note that the count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (Figure 8) described below, but if the probability setting change or probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321).
The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation.

Next, the gaming control device 100 allows an interrupt (A1035). This makes it possible to execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7). Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). If the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (A1037). If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. on the other hand,
If a power outage has occurred (the result of A1037 is "Y"), steps A1055-A10
61 is executed when a power outage occurs.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power outage has not occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The settings confirmation state (settings confirmation mode) continues.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off, the game control device 100 (A1036
The result is "Y"), interrupts are prohibited (A1038), and a command to end the notification is sent to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1039). In addition, the production control device 300 that has received the command to end the notification ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the notification that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether the probability setting has been changing so far (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting has been changing so far, execute the RAM initialization process (described later) in steps A1042 to A1044. do. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting has been confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored) Perform normal processing.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041).
. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is "Y"), the R.A.
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing probability setting values is set to 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Furthermore, the aforementioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the stack area and unused area are not cleared, and a configuration in which the work area and stack area related to performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. . The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, and includes, for example, ball output rate, base value (ball output rate in normal gaming state), role object ratio, number of balls ejected, etc. be.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1044), and the process moves to step A1047.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, the gaming control device 100 (A1
041 result is "N"), and the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are both off, so normal power-on processing (power restoration time) is started and power failure recovery processing is executed ( A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power restoration (power restoration) is saved in the area to be initialized. Additionally, the aforementioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command for power outage recovery corresponding to a process number prepared in order to rationally execute the special game process described below is sent to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1046), and step A10
The process moves to step 47.

Note that the RAM initialization command sent in the process of step A1044 and the power failure recovery command sent in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and a reservation for special drawings 1 and 2. Decorative special figure 1 reserved number command and decorative special figure 2 reserved number command that indicate the number, probability information command that indicates the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and the presence or absence of time saving state, special figure fluctuation in the predetermined production mode It includes a performance number information command that indicates the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command that indicates that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the commands at the time of RAM initialization and the commands at the time of power restoration include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information that is information on the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. It will be done. The game control device 100 only needs to send the setting value information command to the production control device 300 once when the power is restored (turned on), and from then on, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the performance.

Note that the RAM initialization commands also include a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The production control device 300 that received the RAM initialization command, for example,
A customer waiting demonstration is displayed on the display device 41, and the RAM
Initialization (RAM clear) will be notified for 30 seconds. Further, the commands at the time of power restoration include a screen designation command that designates the display contents of the screen of the display device 41. In addition, the command specified on the screen is used for both special drawings 1 and 2 during normal processing (when neither fluctuation nor winning occurs).
, is a customer waiting demo command, and otherwise is a recovery screen command.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the gaming control device 100 starts and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (C
The CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register (TC update permission register). Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

A bit transposition pattern is a method of replacing the bit arrangement of extracted random numbers (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). This is the pattern that defines the

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken, and the secrecy of the random number can be improved. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Alternatively, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the gaming control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and extracts the values of the corresponding initial value random numbers (the jackpot symbol random numbers that determine the jackpot symbol). Initial value (Jackpot initial value random number), Initial value of the small winning pattern random number that determines the small winning pattern (small winning pattern initial value random number), Initial value of the winning random number that determines the hit of the regular pattern (initial winning value random number) , the initial value of the fall lottery random number used in the fall lottery (fall lottery initial value random number, etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of RWM (A1048), and interrupts are permitted (A10
49). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, so this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to obtain illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number, jackpot symbol random number, hit random number, and falling lottery random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. There is. however,
The jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or faster than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot symbol random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are processed by timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. CTC output with the same cycle (CTC of timer interrupt processing (
This is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2)) that is different from CTC0).

In addition, for jackpot pattern random numbers, winning pattern random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers, we adopt the so-called "initial value change method" in which the starting value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random numbers go around. ing. Note that each of the random numbers may be updated using a counter method such as +1 or 1, or may be updated using a random method in which all values within the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 prohibits interruptions (A1051) and executes performance display editing processing to edit performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (accessory object ratio, ball payout rate, etc.) may be calculated. Furthermore, if the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and stack area related to performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). Thereafter, interrupts are permitted (A1053). This makes it possible to execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7).

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether a power outage has occurred (A1054).
If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1054 is "N"), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processes of steps A1050 to A1054 are repeated until a power outage occurs.

When a power outage occurs (result of A1054 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 starts processing when a power outage occurs, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in power failure inspection area 2 (A1057).
1058). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate the checksum when the RWM power is turned off (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
. Finally, processing is executed to prohibit access to the RWM (A1061), and the game machine waits until the power is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power failure, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power failure has been correctly backed up. This can be determined at the time of reinsertion.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the gaming control device 100 first specifies register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing is equivalent to saving the registers used in main processing. Note that when timer interrupt processing is started, interrupts are automatically disabled.

Next, the gaming control device 100 receives input from various sensors and switches, receives signals,
That is, input processing for reading the status of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirmation flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), a probability setting change/confirmation process is executed to change or confirm the probability setting value (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing probability settings nor checking probability settings (A130
4), based on the output data set in various processes, output processing is executed to perform drive control of actuators such as solenoids (big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) (A1306). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process that outputs the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1307), and further performs a random number update process 1 (A1308), and a random number update process 1 (A1308). Processing 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, it is monitored whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning port switch 38a, and the upper large winning port switch 39a, and monitoring for errors. (A1310) Executes prize opening switch/state monitoring processing to check whether the front frame or glass frame is open or not.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of game balls is occurring in the grand prize opening (A1311). When an abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) to be described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. If abnormal discharge is occurring (result of A1311 is "Y"), processing from step A1317 onward is executed.

The game control device 100 determines if abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is “N”).
, A starting port switch monitoring process is executed to monitor winnings in the starting port using the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a (A1312). Subsequently, a special figure 1 game process is executed to perform a process related to the special figure 1 variable display game (A1313), and then a special figure 2 game process is executed to perform a process related to the special figure 2 variable display game (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal pattern game process that performs processing related to a normal pattern fluctuation display game (A1315). Segment LED editing processing is executed to drive the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10, which display the special figure variation game and various information related to the game, so as to display desired contents (A1316).

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1318).

After that, the gaming control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the big prize opening is executed (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 are operated by the big winning opening switch 43 (lower big winning opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a), specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch), and remaining ball discharge port. Based on the input from the switch 73, abnormal discharge of the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is monitored, and when abnormal discharge occurs, an abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set. In addition, special variable prize winning device 3
The game balls that have passed through the big winning opening switch 43 of 8 and 39 are discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes external information editing processing to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1321). Then, performance display monitor control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing ends.

Note that when timer interrupt processing returns, the interrupt disabled state and register bank specification are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, interrupts may be enabled after external information editing processing. It is also possible to perform processing to return the register bank designation to register bank 0.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

The game control device 100 determines that when the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is “
Y''), sets probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (A2402), and outputs it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), lights-off data is set as probability setting value display data (A2403), and output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2403).
2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of the probability setting value for display displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among hall personnel, etc., even if the probability setting values are different, if the jackpot probability (and small winning probability) is the same, the display probability setting value will be associated with the jackpot probability (and small winning probability). You can make them the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small win probability).

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 1 set in step A1034.
It is 28ms (predetermined time). Next, the on-data of the security signal is sent to the external information terminal 71 to notify an abnormality to an external device (such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer)).
(A1026). Note that at this point, other signals such as the jackpot signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in an OFF state.

After that, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (A2407
If the result is "N"), that is, the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change/confirmation process is ended without doing anything.

When the probability setting changing flag is set, the gaming control device 100 executes (A2407)
If the result is "Y"), that is, the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not this is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A2408). If this is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being updated unintentionally if the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

When the game control device 100 is not processing the first timer interrupt after turning on the power, (A240
8), it is determined whether there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2
409). If there is no input to the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is input, the gaming control device 100 performs (A2409
result is "Y"), the working setting value in the working setting value area (RAM 111c or register) is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5, and the probability in the probability setting value area is updated corresponding to the working setting value. Setting values 1 to 6 are updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112
Each time is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. Thereafter, the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. Note that when entering the setting change mode, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the working setting value every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but the working setting value of the RAM 111c The probability setting value (work setting value) that is being changed is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y").
''), the value corresponding to the working setting value in the working setting value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, if a power outage occurs while changing settings (A1037
If the result is "Y"), it is possible to prevent a situation in which the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, production control, etc. is changed to an unintended value.

[Example of display on performance display device]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display example of the performance display device 152. The performance display device 152 is a 4-digit, 7-segment type (8-segment type if dot Dp is included) display, and each digit of the performance display device 152 has 8 segments a, b, c, d, e, It consists of f, g, and Dp.

In the example of FIG. 9(a), while the probability setting is being changed, digits 1 to 3 are lit with "SET" displayed to indicate that the setting is being changed. On the other hand, while changing the probability settings, RA
Corresponding to the work setting values 0 to 5 that change each time the M initialization switch 112 is operated, at digit 0, the display probability setting value changes to, for example, "1" to "6" and is displayed in a lit state.

In the example of FIG. 9(b), when the probability setting value is not within the normal range and is abnormal (the result of A2401 is "N"), the off data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the digit 0 goes out. Note that in digits 1 to 3, the display of "SET" indicating that the setting is being changed is not turned off.

In the example of FIG. 9(c), if the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on (the result of A1022 is "Y
), or if the power is turned off and restarted while changing the probability setting (before the setting change is complete) (A
The result of 1023 is "Y"), and the 7-segment display data error display "E1" when the game is stopped is digit 1.
, 2 is lit and displayed (A1024).

[Start switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be explained. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The gaming control device 100 first prepares a starting opening 1 winning monitoring table for monitoring winnings to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), and performs a hard random number acquisition process to acquire a hard random number as a jackpot random number. (A2702). Next, it is determined whether there is a winning opening in the first starting winning opening 36 (A2703). And if there is no starting prize (A
If the result of step A2703 is "N"), the process moves to step A2709.

The game control device 100, when there is a winning opening to the first starting winning opening 36 (A2703
The result is "Y"), the probability of occurrence of jackpot is low probability state and no time saving state (state without public power support). (A2704). If the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress (normal game state). If it is a low probability state and no time saving state (the result of A2704 is "Y")
), that is, in the normal gaming state, the process moves to step A2707.

When the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is not in a low probability state (in a high probability state) or in a state with time saving (a state with power supply support) (the result of A2704 is "N"), A right-hand hitting instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (A2705), and production command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the production control device 300 issues a right-hitting instruction display to the display device 41 as a warning when there is a winning opening in the first starting winning opening 36 in the special symbol high probability state or time-saving state. can be displayed. In addition, in the production command setting process, the production command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the production command is transmitted to the production control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on reservation due to winning in the first starting winning hole 36 (starting hole 1) (A2707), and executes special drawing starting hole switch common processing (A2708). ).

Next, the game control device 100 operates the normal variable prize winning device 37 (second starting prize opening, starting opening 2).
A starting opening 2 winning monitoring table for monitoring winnings is prepared (A2709), and a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number as a jackpot random number is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a starting opening winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (A2711). If there is no starting port winning (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended.

The game control device 100, when there is a starting opening prize to the normal variable prize winning device 37 (A271
1 result is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the normal variable prize winning device 37 is operating (normal power operating) (A2712). If the normal variable prize winning device 37 is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “
N''), it is determined whether or not fraud (normal wire fraud) against the normal variable prize winning device 37 is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is greater than or equal to the number of fraudulent winnings determined to occur (for example, five or more), it can be determined that regular electricity fraud is occurring. Normal variable prize winning device 37
If fraud is occurring (result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is ended.

The gaming control device 100 determines that if no fraud is occurring against the normal variable prize winning device 37 (A2
713 result is "N"), prepares a table for setting information on reservation due to winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A2714), and executes special drawing starting port switch common processing (A2714).
2715), the start port switch monitoring process ends.

When the game control device 100 is experiencing fraud against the normal variable prize winning device 37 (A2
If the result of step A2712 is "Y"), the process of step A2713 is not executed, and the process of steps A2714 and A2715 is executed.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the special figure starting port switch common process (A270) in the above-mentioned starting port switch monitoring process.
8, A2715) will be explained in detail. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common process. Special figure starting port switch common processing is starting port 1 switch 36
This is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

The gaming control device 100 first outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target starting port switch of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. The number of times the starting port signal is output is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (A2903 result is "N"),
Save the updated value in the starting port signal output frequency area of RWM (A2904), and proceed to step A.
The process moves to step 2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process moves to step A2905. In this embodiment, values from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the number of outputs has overflowed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the number of special symbols pending (the number of starting memories) to be updated corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. (A2905). When the number of reserved special figures to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting opening switch common process is ended. In addition, if the number of reserved special drawings to be updated is less than the upper limit (result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of reserved special drawings to be updated (number of reserved special drawings 1 or number of reserved special drawings 2) is updated by +1. (A2906), and saves the target starting opening winning flag (A2907).

Next, the gaming control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special symbols (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save to area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the RWM jackpot symbol random number storage area (A2911).

After that, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a falling lottery random number for drawing a lottery for a fall of the jackpot probability from a high probability state to a low probability state (A2912), and stores the falling lottery random number as a falling lottery random number. Save to area (A2913).

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not it is a winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A2914). If it is not a winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2914 is "N"), the process moves to step A2917. On the other hand, if the winning is in the starting winning hole 36 (the result of A2914 is "Y"), extract the small winning symbol random number and prepare it (A
2915), and save in the RWM small winning symbol random number storage area (A2916).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2917), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2
918). Then, a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the monitoring target start switch and the number of special figure reservations is prepared as a production command (A2919), and a production command setting process (A292
0) to end the special figure starting port switch common process. The decoration special figure reservation number command is
The starting port 1 switch 36a is the decoration special figure 1 reserved number command, and the starting port 2 switch 37a is the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command.
Here is the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the starting winning hole 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, which becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It constitutes a start-up memory means for storing up to a predetermined number of start-up memories. Also,
The starting storage means (gaming control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning hole (starting winning hole 36), with a predetermined number as the upper limit, as a first starting memory. , various random numbers extracted based on winnings of game balls into the second starting winning hole (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information determination process]
Next, the special figure holding information determination process (A2918
) will be explained in detail. FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B are flowcharts showing the first half and second half of the special figure reservation information determination process (pre-reading process, advance determination process). The special figure pending information determination process is executed for the special figures 1 and 2 starting memory generated based on the winning of game balls to the first starting winning hole 36 and the normal variable winning device 37.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is a jackpot (in a special game state) (A3001). When the jackpot is in progress (the result of A3001 is "Y"), the special figure pending information determination process is ended. If it is not a jackpot (the result of A3001 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning is in the first starting winning hole 36 (starting hole 1) (A3002). If the winning is in the starting opening 1 (result of A3002 is "Y"), that is, if the winning is in the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1), pre-reading processing (pre-judgment processing) is executed. In order to do so, step A3004
Move on to subsequent processing.

If the game control device 100 does not win the starting opening 1 (the result of A3002 is “N”),
Check whether the probability of winning a jackpot is low and there is no time saving (state with no power support), that is, whether the special drawing probability is low and there is no time saving (normal gaming state). judge(
A3003). When the special figure is low probability & there is no time saving (result of A3003 is "Y"), the special figure pending information determination process is ended. That is, in the normal gaming state, the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2)
If it is a winning prize, the special figure pending information determination process is ended without executing the pre-reading process (prior determination process). In addition, in the normal gaming state, as will be described later, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game often fluctuates for a long time (long fluctuation) and is forced to end with a wrong result, so pre-reading processing (pre-judgment processing) is performed to avoid waste. do not execute.

When the game control device 100 is not in the special drawing low probability & no time saving mode (the result of A3003 is “
In other words, in order to execute the pre-reading process (pre-judgment process) when the winning is in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) in a state other than the normal gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state), step A3004 is executed. Move on to subsequent processing.

Then, the gaming control device 100 starts a pre-reading process (prior determination process) and determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is in a high probability state, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (A3004
). When the special pattern high probability flag (in this embodiment, the special pattern high probability & time saving flag) is set in the special pattern game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special pattern is high probability. If the probability of special drawing is high (result of A3004 is "Y"), it is determined whether the falling lottery random number prepared in step A2912 is within the judgment value range for falling winning (A3005), and a look-ahead falling lottery corresponding to the determination result is performed. The information command is prepared as a production command (A3006), and production command setting processing is performed (A3007). Next, the gaming control device 100 prepares a low probability determination flag for performing a look-ahead jackpot determination in a low probability state (A3008). If the special figure is not in high probability (A3
004 is "N"), there is no fall from a high probability state to a low probability state in the first place, so the process moves to step A3008 without executing the pre-reading process regarding a fall (A3005-A3007).

Thereafter, the gaming control device 100 executes a look-ahead jackpot determination process (described later) based on the jackpot random number prepared in step A2909 (A3009), and determines whether the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3010). ). If the judgment result is a jackpot (A3
010 result is "Y"), the target starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a or starting port 2
Set the jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to switch 37a) (A3011),
Obtain stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number (A3012), and step A3
The process moves to step 019.

The game control device 100 performs (A3
010 result is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is a winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A3013). If the prize is entered in starting port 2 (result of A3013 is “Y”),
Since a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game that is executed by winning the starting slot 2, a small hit determination process described below is executed as a pre-read process regarding the small hit (A3014),
It is determined whether the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3015). Then, if the determination result is a small hit (result of A3015 is "Y"), a small hit pattern random number check table is set (A3016), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit pattern random number is acquired ( A3017), the process moves to step A3019.

The game control device 100 determines that if there is no winning in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3013 is “N”)
Since a small hit cannot occur in the special figure 1 variable display game, stop symbol information for a loss is set (A3018). That is, when the determination result is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, stop symbol information of a loss is set. In addition, if the judgment result is not a small hit by winning in the starting slot 2 (A3
If the result of 015 is "N"), that is, the determination result is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, stop symbol information of a loss is set (A3018). Thereafter, the process moves to step A3019.

After steps A3012, A3017, and A3018, the game control device 100 saves the stopped symbol information in the symbol information area (A3019). The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in the variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. Then, a pre-read stop symbol command (low probability) for low probability corresponding to the target start switch and stop symbol information is prepared as a production command (A3020), and production command setting processing is executed (A3021).
).

Next, the gaming control device 100 prepares a high probability determination flag for performing look-ahead jackpot determination in a high probability state (A3022), and similarly to A3009-A3018, A3023-A3
032 processing is executed. First, execute the look-ahead jackpot determination process (A3023), which will be described later.
It is determined whether the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3024). If the judgment result is a jackpot (the result of A3024 is "Y"), a jackpot pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a or starting port 2 switch 37a) is set (A3025). , acquires the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number (A3026), and moves to the process of step A3033.

The game control device 100 performs (A3
024 is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is a winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A3027). If the prize is won in starting port 2 (result of A3027 is “Y”),
Since a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game that is executed by winning a prize in the starting slot 2, a small hit determination process to be described later is executed as a pre-read process regarding the small hit (A3028),
It is determined whether the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3029). Then, if the determination result is a small hit (result of A3029 is "Y"), a small hit pattern random number check table is set (A3030), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit pattern random number is acquired ( A3031), the process moves to step A3033.

The game control device 100 determines that if there is no winning in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3027 is “N”)
Since a small hit cannot occur in the special figure 1 variable display game, stop symbol information for a loss is set (A3032). That is, when the determination result is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, stop symbol information of a loss is set. In addition, if the judgment result is not a small hit by winning in the starting slot 2 (A3
029 result is "N"), that is, when the determination result is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, stop symbol information of a loss is set (A3032). Thereafter, the process moves to step A3033.

After steps A3026, A3031, and A3032, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a special pattern with high probability (A3033). When the special figure is high probability (A3033
The result is "Y"), the stopped symbol information is overwritten and saved in the symbol information area (A3034),
The process moves to step A3035. The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in the variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. If the special figure is not in high probability (A30
33 result is "N"), step A is executed without overwriting the stop symbol information in the symbol information area.
The process moves to step 3035.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a high probability look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information as a performance command (A3035).
, executes production command setting processing (A3036).

Next, a special figure information setting process is executed to set special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3037), and a variation pattern setting process is executed to set a variation mode of the special figure variation display game as a look-ahead. (A3038). Then, a pre-read variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared as a production command (A3039), a production command setting process is executed (A3040), and a special figure pending information determination process is executed. finish.

The performance control device 300 receives both the prefetch stop symbol command (low probability) and the prefetch stop symbol command (high probability), but if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is low probability, the prefetch stop symbol command ( If the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a high probability state, use the prefetch stop symbol command (high probability) to execute the prefetch symbol command processing (Fig. 51). (FIG. 51) may be executed.

[Look-ahead jackpot determination process]
Next, look ahead jackpot determination processing (A3009, A3023
) will be explained in detail. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead jackpot determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A3101), and determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3102). Note that a jackpot means that the jackpot random number matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the jackpot judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value, , it is determined that it is a jackpot.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A310
2), a loss (other than a jackpot) is set as the judgment result (A3107), and the look-ahead jackpot judgment process is ended.

In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value, the game control device 100 (A3
102 result is "N"), it is determined whether the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (A3
103). If the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (the result of A3103 is "Y"), an upper limit determination value among high probabilities corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3104). On the other hand, if the determination flag is not a high probability determination flag (if it is a low probability determination flag), (A3
103 result is "N"), set the upper limit judgment value among low probabilities corresponding to the probability setting value (A3
105).

After setting the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3106). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3106 is "Y"), a loss (other than a jackpot) is set as the determination result (A3107). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3106 is "N"), and a jackpot is set as the determination result (A3108). Once the determination result is set, the look-ahead jackpot determination process ends.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

The game control device 100 first displays the special figure 1 variable display game indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being suspended.
It is determined whether the game interruption flag is set (A3201).

If the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being suspended is not set (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 controls the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is determined whether it is in the state or in the small hit state (A3202). If the special figure 2 variable display game is neither in the jackpot state nor the small win state (the result of A3202 is "N"),
The big prize opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the big prize opening switch monitoring process,
Detection of game balls at the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is monitored. Then, a specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure 1 game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (
subtract by 1) (A3205). By updating the special figure 1 game processing timer by -1, the timer is counted by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. If the special figure 2 variable display game is in the jackpot or small win state (result of A3202 is "Y"), steps A3203, A32
The process in step A3205 is performed without performing the process in step A3205. Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). If the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N"), the process moves to step A3217.

When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3206 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 game processing timer.
The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the game process number is set in the register (A3207). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is obtained using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3
208). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made based on the special figure 1 game processing number, and a game branching process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is executed (A3209).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A3209, the gaming control device 100
A special figure that monitors the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game, sets the start of change of the special figure 1 variable display game, sets effects, and sets information necessary to perform processing during special figure 1 variation. 1. Execute normal processing (A3210). The details of the special figure 1 normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 16.

If the game processing number is “1” in step A3209, the gaming control device 100
The special figure 1 fluctuation process is executed to set the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary to perform the special figure 1 display process (A3211). In addition, the details of the process during special figure 1 fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is “2” in step A3209, the gaming control device 100
If the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot, set the jackpot fanfare command according to the type of jackpot, set the fanfare time according to the jackpot opening pattern of each jackpot, and perform fanfare/interval processing. The special figure 1 displaying process is executed to set the information necessary for the execution (A3212). Note that details of the process during display of the special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

If the game processing number is “3” in step A3209, the gaming control device 100
Fanfare/interval processing is executed to set the opening time of the grand prize opening, update the number of openings, and set information necessary to perform the grand prize opening processing (A3213). Note that details of the fanfare/interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

If the game processing number is “4” in step A3209, the gaming control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the process of setting the ending command and the setting of the information necessary to process the remaining balls in the jackpot opening are performed. Medium processing is executed (A3214).

If the game processing number is “5” in step A3209, the gaming control device 100
A jackpot remaining ball process is executed to set the interval time and ending time, and to set the information necessary to perform the jackpot end process (A3215).

If the game processing number is “6” in step A3209, the gaming control device 100
The special figure 1 jackpot end process is executed to set the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later), set the information necessary to execute the special figure 1 normal process, etc. (A3216). In addition, special map 1
Details of the jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), and then starts the special figure 1 display. The symbol fluctuation control process related to the machine 51 is executed (A3218), and the lever solenoid 86 is
The lever solenoid control process for controlling b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process is ended.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (the result of A3201 is "Y"), the game control device 100 performs step A32
Special figure 1 for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 without performing the processing from 02 to A3216
After preparing the fluctuation control table (A3217), execute the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 1 display 51 (A3218), execute the lever solenoid control process to control the lever solenoid 86b (A3219), End game processing. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) that measures the variable time is stopped. In addition, by the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol itself may apparently continue on the special symbol 1 display 51.

[Special figure 2 game processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. FIGS. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing the first half and second half of the special figure 2 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in a jackpot state (A3301). If the special figure 1 variable display game is not in the jackpot state (the result of A3301 is "N"), the jackpot switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is controlled by the lower winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detections. Then, a specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (
subtract by 1) (A3304). By updating the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1, the timer is counted by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

When the game control device 100 is in the jackpot state of the special figure 1 variable display game (A3301
result is "Y"), step A33 is executed without performing steps A3302 and A3303.
04 processing is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is "N"), the process moves to step A3323.

When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3305 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 game processing timer.
It is determined whether the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (A3306). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3306 is "N"),
Update the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 (A3307), and save the long variable timer value (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (
A3308). As described later, when the special figure 2 variable display game has a long variation and the variation time is long (for example, 10 minutes), the timer for the variation time cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3306-A3308 By this process, the long fluctuation timer value is counted by the number of repetitions, thereby preparing a long fluctuation time timer for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 controls when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3305 is "Y") and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3306 is "Y"). , the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register (A3309). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made based on the special figure 2 game processing number, and a game branching process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is executed (A3311).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100
A special figure that monitors the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game, sets the start of change of the special figure 2 variable display game, sets effects, and sets information necessary for processing during special figure 2 variation. 2 Execute normal processing (A3312). The details of the special figure 2 normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 17.

If the game processing number is “1” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100
The special figure 2 fluctuation process is executed to set the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary to perform the special figure 2 display process (A3313). In addition, the details of the process during special figure 2 fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

If the game processing number is “2” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100
If the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot, set the jackpot fanfare command according to the type of jackpot, set the fanfare time according to the jackpot opening pattern of each jackpot, and perform fanfare/interval processing. The special figure 2 displaying process is executed to set the information necessary for the display (A3314). Note that the details of the special figure 2 display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

If the game processing number is “3” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100
Fanfare/interval processing is executed to set the opening time of the grand prize opening, update the number of openings, and set information necessary to perform the grand prize opening processing (A3315). Note that the fanfare/interval processing is common to that executed within the special figure 1 game processing, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

If the game processing number is “4” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the process of setting the ending command and the setting of the information necessary to process the remaining balls in the jackpot opening are performed. Medium processing is executed (A3316).

If the game processing number is “5” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100
A jackpot remaining ball process is executed to set the interval time and ending time, and to set the information necessary to perform the jackpot end process (A3317).

If the game processing number is “6” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100
The special figure 2 jackpot end process is executed to set the information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process (A3318). The details of the special drawing 2 jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

If the game processing number is “7” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100
A small win fanfare process is executed to set the opening time of the big prize opening, update the number of openings, and set information necessary to perform the small win process (A3319). The small win fanfare process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45.

If the game processing number is “8” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100
A small winning process is executed to set a small winning end command and information necessary to perform a small winning remaining ball process (A3320).

If the game processing number is “9” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100
The small hit remaining ball process is executed to set the ending time and the information necessary to perform the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321).

If the game processing number is "10" in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special drawing 2 small hit end processing that sets the information necessary to execute the special drawing 2 normal processing. (A3322). In addition, details of the special figure 2 small hit termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3323), and then starts the special figure 2 display. The symbol fluctuation control process related to the device 52 is executed (A3324), and the lever solenoid 86 is
The lever solenoid control process for controlling b is executed (A3325), and the special figure 2 game process is ended.

[Special drawing 1 normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 normal process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be explained. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 1 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (A3401). If the special figure 1 variable display game cannot start changing (if the change cannot start) (the result of A3401 is "N"), set the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" as the special figure 1 game processing number. (A3416), and save in the RWM special figure 1 game processing number area (A3417). In addition, here, from the end of the fluctuation of the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable display game (in process during special figure 2 display) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 2 jackpot end process), and the process of the special figure 2 variable display game. From the end of the small winning variation (during special figure 2 display process) to the end of the small winning operation (special figure 2 small winning end process), it is assumed that the special figure 1 variable display game cannot start the variation.

The game control device 100 determines whether the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (A3401
(the result is "Y"), it is determined whether the left-handed batting instruction has been notified (A3402). If a left-handed hitting instruction notification command has already been prepared as a production command and transmitted to the production control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed hitting instruction notification has been completed. If the left-handed batting instruction has been notified (A34
02 is "Y"), the process moves to step A3406.

If the left-handed game instruction has not been notified based on the left-handed game instruction notification flag (the result of A3402 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a left-handed game instruction notification command as a production command (A3403), and performs production command setting processing. (A3404), and sets a left-handed hitting instruction notification flag indicating that a left-handed hitting instruction will be notified (displayed) on the display device 41 etc. (A340).
5).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (A3406).
. If the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (the result of A3406 is "Y"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM (A3402). As a result, the special figure 1 normal processing is repeated until the number of reserved figures 1 becomes 1 or more.

If the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not 0 (the result of A3406 is “N”), the gaming control device 100
A variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the presence or absence of a time saving state is prepared as a production command (A3407), and production command setting processing is executed (A3408). Subsequently, special figure 1 variation start processing is executed to start the special figure 1 variation display game (A3409). After that, a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the number of special figures 1 reservation is prepared as a production command (A3410), and a production command setting process is executed (A3411).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the remaining number of games command corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time reduction state, as a production command (A34
12) Execute production command setting processing (A3413). The production control device 300 that has received the remaining number of games command can grasp the number of time reduction fluctuations.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets the information on the special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, the information that the special figure 1 is changing or (the special figure 1 is changing + the special figure 2 is changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, execute the special figure 1 fluctuating process transition setting process, which is the process for transitioning to the special figure 1 fluctuating process (
A3415). In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number "1" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Special drawing 2 normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 normal process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be explained. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (A3501). If the special figure 2 variable display game cannot start changing (if the change cannot start) (the result of A3501 is "N"), set the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" as the special figure 2 game processing number. (A3518), and save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). In addition, here, from the end of the fluctuation of the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 1 display processing in progress) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 1 jackpot end processing), the special figure 2 variable display game will change It is considered not possible to start.

The game control device 100 determines whether the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (A3501
The result is "Y"), and it is determined whether the number of reserved special drawings 2 is 0 or not (A3502). If the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3502 is "N"), prepare a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the presence or absence of the time saving state as a production command. (A3503), and performs production command setting processing (A3504). Next, special map 2
Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display game is executed (A3505).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the number of special figures 2 reservation as a production command (A3506), and executes production command setting processing ( A3507). After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction variation number, which is the number of remaining special figure variation display games in the time reduction state, as a production command (A3508), and executes production command setting processing. (A3509
). The production control device 300 that has received the remaining number of games command can grasp the number of time reduction fluctuations.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets the information on the special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3510). Here, the information that the special figure 2 is changing or (the special figure 1 is changing + the special figure 2 is changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, execute the special figure 2 fluctuating process transition setting process, which is the process for transitioning to the special figure 2 fluctuating process (
A3511). In the special figure 2 variable process transition setting process, for example, the process number "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

The gaming control device 100, if the number of special drawings 2 pending is 0 (result of A3502 is "Y"),
It is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 or not (A3512). If the number of reserved special drawings 1 is 0 (
The result of A3512 is "Y"), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed) (A3513). If special figure 1 is not changing (result of A3513 is "N")
), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3514). If the customer waiting demonstration has not started (A3514 result is "N"), set the customer waiting demonstration flag (A3515).
.

Next, the gaming control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state as a production command (A3516), and executes production command setting processing (A3517).
The performance control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demonstration command can execute a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41. After that, set the special figure 2 normal process number "0" as the special figure 2 game process number (A
3518), save in the RWM special figure 2 game processing number area (A3519). As a result, the special figure 2 normal processing is repeated until the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not 0 (the result of A3512 is "N"), the special drawing 1 variable display game will be executed, so the special drawing 2 The number "0" for the special figure 2 normal process is set as the game process number (A3518), and saved in the special figure 2 game process number area of the RWM (A3519). Also, if special map 1 is changing (A35
13 result is "Y"), or if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (the result of A3514 is "Y").
), without preparing the customer waiting demo command, set the special map 2 normal processing number "0" as the special map 2 game processing number (A3518), and set it in the special map 2 game processing number area of RWM. Save (A3519).

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3409) in the special figure 1 normal process will be explained. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol 1 variation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a).
In addition, the special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of look-ahead variation patterns), etc. Next, load random numbers from the special drawing 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for the number of reservations of 1) and prepare them (A3602a), and clear the special drawing 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for the number of reservations of 1) to 0 (A3603a). , executes a falling lottery process to be described later (A3604a). Note that the reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) regarding the special figure starting memory whose consumption order is the first (in this case, the first among the special figures 1).

Next, the game control device 100 performs a jackpot flag 1 setting process (which sets loss information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot or not).
A3605a), special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A
3606a), executes a special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variable pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variable pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game is set (A3608a ). Next, a special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (A3609a) that sets a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game, and a variation start information setting process (A3609a) that sets information on the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game. A3610a) is executed. Then, a time reduction variation number update process is executed to update the time reduction variation number (A3
611a).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets the processing number to “1” in order to move to the special figure 1 fluctuation processing.
” (A3612a) and save the processing number in the special map 1 game processing number area (A3
613a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (A3614a), and the signal regarding the start of variation of special symbol 1 (on data of special symbol 1 fluctuating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3616a). Next, save the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking control timer (timer for the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (A3617).
a) Save the initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-lit symbol) in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (A3618a), and end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3505) in the special figure 2 normal process will be explained. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start process replaces “jackpot flag 1” with “jackpot flag 2” and “special figure 1” with “special figure 2” in the special figure 1 variation start process (Fig. 18), Since the same process as the special figure 1 variation start process is performed, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that steps A3601b to A3618b in the special figure 2 variation start process correspond to steps A3601a to A3618a in the special figure 1 variation start process, respectively.

[Fall lottery processing]
Next, the falling lottery process (A3604
a, A3604b) will be explained in detail. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fall lottery process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is in a high probability state (variable probability state), that is, whether or not it is in a special pattern high probability state (A3701). If the high probability of special drawings is not achieved (the result of A3701 is "N"), the falling lottery process is ended.

The game control device 100 determines that when the probability of special drawing is high (the result of A3701 is "Y"), the value of the falling lottery random number of the target (special drawing 1 or special drawing 2) is less than the falling lottery lower limit judgment value. It is determined whether or not (A3702). If it is less than the fall lottery lower limit judgment value (the result of A3702 is “Y”)
”), the falling lottery process ends. If it is equal to or greater than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is greater than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (A3703). If it is larger than the fall lottery upper limit judgment value (the result of A3703 is "Y")
, the falling lottery process ends.

The game control device 100 determines that the result of A3703 is "N" when the falling lottery upper limit judgment value is below.
), since the value of the target falling lottery random number is between the falling lottery upper limit judgment value and the falling lottery lower limit judgment value, the process at the time of winning the falling lottery is started, and first, the signal regarding the high probability end is sent to the RWM. Save in the external information output data area (A3704). Here, the signal regarding high probability termination is
These are the off data (off signal) of the jackpot 2 signal and the off data (off signal) of the jackpot 4 signal. As a result, a signal regarding high probability termination is outputted as external information to the external information terminal 71 and eventually to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (A3705). Signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are, for example, off data of special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1
These are the off data of the fluctuation time shortening state signal and the off data of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed batting instruction in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, the number without time saving is saved in the game status display number area of the RWM (A3707). The special symbol low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special symbol game mode flag area of RWM (A3708), and the falling lottery process is ended. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of jackpot is low and there is no time saving state (normal game state).

As described above, in the variable probability state (medium high probability of special symbols), the falling lottery is executed at the start of each special symbol variable display game, and when the falling lottery is won, it changes from the variable probability state (high probability state) to the normal game state (low probability state). A fall process (A3704-A3708) is executed to fall to a probability state).

[Jackpot flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The gaming control device 100 first saves the loss information in the RWM jackpot flag 1 area (A3801). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special drawing 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (A3802). Note that the reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) regarding the special figure starting memory whose consumption order is the first (in this case, the first among the special figures 1). After that, clear the special drawing 1 jackpot random number storage area (for pending number 1) to 0 (A3803)
.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3804). jackpot flag 2
If it is not a jackpot (the result of A3804 is "N"), based on the obtained jackpot random number,
Executes jackpot determination processing to determine whether the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot (A38
05), it is determined whether the result of the determination is a jackpot (A3806). If the result of the determination is a jackpot (result of A3806 is "Y"), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3801 (A3807), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. In addition, since jackpot flag 1 can become a jackpot only when jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area), it is possible to avoid jackpot flag 1 and jackpot flag 2 from becoming a jackpot at the same time. .

If the jackpot flag 2 indicates a jackpot (if the result of A3804 is “Y
), or if the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a jackpot (the result of A3806 is "N"), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is ended.

[Jackpot flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

The gaming control device 100 first saves the loss information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM (
A3901), loss information is saved in the RWM jackpot flag 2 area (A3902).
Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special drawing 2 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1),
Prepare (A3903). Note that the reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) regarding the special figure starting memory whose consumption order is the first (in this case, the first among the special figures 2). After that, the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3905). jackpot flag 1
If it is not a jackpot (the result of A3905 is "N"), based on the obtained jackpot random number,
Execute jackpot determination processing to determine whether the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot (A39
06), it is determined whether the result of the determination is a jackpot (A3907). If the result of the determination is a jackpot (the result of A3907 is "Y"), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3902 (A3908), and the jackpot flag 2 setting process is performed. finish. In addition, since jackpot flag 2 can become a jackpot only when jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area), it is possible to avoid jackpot flag 1 and jackpot flag 2 from becoming a jackpot at the same time. .

If the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (if the result of A3905 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100
), or if the determination result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a jackpot (the result of A3907 is "N"), based on the obtained jackpot random value, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or not. A small hit determination process is executed to determine whether or not it is a small hit (A3909), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit (A3910). In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used for the small hit determination (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit determination and the jackpot determination). Special map 2
If the variable display game is a small hit (result of A3910 is "Y"), step A3901
Overwrite the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area where you saved the loss information and save it (A
3911), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends. If the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910 is "N"), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is ended without saving the small win information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the jackpot determination process (
A3805, A3906) will be explained in detail. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot determination processing. Note that the jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A4001), and determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). Note that a jackpot means that the jackpot random number matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the jackpot judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value, , it is determined that it is a jackpot.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A400
2), a loss (other than a jackpot) is set as the judgment result (A4007), and the jackpot judgment process is ended.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value, the game control device 100 (A4
The result of 002 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A4003). Then, when the special figure is in high probability (the result of A4003 is "Y"), an upper limit judgment value in high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4004). On the other hand, if it is not in the special pattern high probability (A
4003 result is "N"), set the upper limit judgment value among low probabilities corresponding to the probability setting value (A
4005).

After setting the upper limit determination value of the jackpot random number value, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is "Y"), a loss (other than a jackpot) is set as the determination result (A4007). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A4006 is "N"), and a jackpot is set as the determination result (A4008). Once the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3909) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process etc. will be explained. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. Note that the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). Note that a small hit means that the jackpot random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined that there is a small hit.

Naturally, in order to avoid the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game being both a small hit and a jackpot, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the same as the above-mentioned jackpot judgment value. The value ranges (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value) do not overlap. Note that in this embodiment,
Although the small hit random number is not provided independently and the jackpot random number is used to determine the small win, it is also possible to provide a unique small hit random number.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A
The result of step 4101 is "Y"), a loss is set as the determination result (A4103), and the small hit determination process is ended.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value. is determined (A4102). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (A
The result of step 4102 is "Y"), and a failure is set as the determination result (A4103). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4102 is "N"), a small hit is set as the judgment result (A4104). After setting the determination result, the small hit determination process ends.

[Jackpot probability, small hit probability, fall probability]
25(a), (b), and (c) are special figure fluctuation display games determined as a result of the above-mentioned jackpot determination process (FIG. 23), small hit determination process (FIG. 24), and falling lottery process (FIG. 20). This is a table illustrating the jackpot probability, small win probability, and fall probability.

In the example of FIG. 25(a), the jackpot probability in the high probability state (high probability state) is from the probability setting value 1 to
6 (settings 1 to 6). On the other hand, the jackpot probability in a low probability state (low probability state)
tends to increase as the probability setting value becomes larger (higher setting), and the larger the probability setting value is, the more likely a jackpot will occur, which is advantageous to the player. In this way, only one of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state may be configured to increase as the probability setting value increases. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 23 by the value range of the jackpot random number. The jackpot probability can be changed in accordance with the probability setting value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the value range of the jackpot random number in addition to the upper limit judgment value in accordance with the probability setting value.

In addition, the jackpot probability (
High probability state) and jackpot probability (low probability state) are the same. Note that the jackpot probabilities may be different for all settings. Further, even if the jackpot probabilities are the same, the performance control device 300 can execute a performance according to each probability setting value (variable performance setting process to be described later).

In the example of FIG. 25(b), the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state, and regardless of the probability setting value (setting). The small hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the small hit upper limit determination value and the small hit lower limit determination value in FIG. 24 by the value range of the jackpot random number. As shown in FIG. 14, in the special figure 1 variable display game, a small hit does not occur (the probability of a small win is zero). In addition, a configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game is also possible.

In the example of FIG. 25(c), the probability of falling as the probability of winning the falling lottery is the probability setting value (setting)
Regardless of whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, and regardless of whether it is a special figure 1 variable display game or a special figure 2 variable display game, it is constant (1/237). be. The fall probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the fall lottery upper limit determination value and the fall lottery lower limit determination value in FIG. 20 by the value range of the fall lottery random number.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3606a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4201). jackpot flag 1
If it is a jackpot (the result of A4201 is "Y"), a jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4202). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (A4203), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the RWM special symbol 1 stop symbol save area (A4204). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A42
05), acquire the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number and save it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4206). The stop symbol pattern is the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 display 5)
This is for setting the stop symbols in 1) and the stop symbols on the display device 41. Then, time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4207). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time reduction state after the end of the jackpot (with or without time reduction), and is used in the later-described special chart 1 jackpot end process and special chart 2 jackpot end process.

Next, the gaming control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number, saves it in the special pattern 1 round number upper limit value information area of RWM (A4208), and wins the big prize corresponding to the stopped symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the RWM special drawing 1 big winning opening information area (A4209). Thereafter, the process moves to step A4212. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4201 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of a miss in the special symbol 1 stop symbol evacuation area (A4210
), the missed stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4211). Thereafter, the process moves to step A4212.

After steps A4209 and A4211, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command in the decorative special figure 1 command area as a production command (A4212). Through the above processing, the stop symbols corresponding to the results of the special figure 1 variable display game are set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes production command setting processing (A4213). Thereby, the decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the production control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4214), and clears the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for pending number 1) to 0 (A4215) ). After that, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3606b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A4301). jackpot flag 2
If it is a jackpot (the result of A4301 is "Y"), a jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4302). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (A4303), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and it is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4304). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table (A43
05), acquire the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number and save it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306). The stop symbol pattern is the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 2 display 5)
This is for setting the stop symbols in 2) and the stop symbols on the display device 41. Then, time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4307). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time reduction state after the end of the jackpot (with or without time reduction), and is used in the later-described special chart 1 jackpot end process and special chart 2 jackpot end process.

Next, the gaming control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number, saves it in the RWM special pattern 2 round number upper limit value information area (A4308), and wins the big prize corresponding to the stopped symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the RWM special drawing two major winning opening information area (A4309). Thereafter, the process moves to step A4317. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A4301 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit or not, that is, the small win information is in the small hit flag 2 area. Determine whether it has been saved (A4310). When the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit (the result of A4310 is "Y"), a small hit pattern random number is loaded from the special pattern 2 small winning pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4311). Next, set the special figure 1 small hit symbol table (A
4312), acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small winning symbol random number, and save it in the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area (A4313). This process selects the type of specific result.
Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4314). Thereafter, the process moves to step A4317.

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4310 is “N”), the game control device 100
''), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area (A4315), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4316). Thereafter, the process moves to step A4317.

After steps A4309, A4314, and A4316, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 2 command as a production command in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A4317 ). Through the above processing, the stop symbols corresponding to the results of the special figure 2 variable display game are set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes production command setting processing (A4318). The decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the production control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319), and clears the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for pending number 1) to 0 (A4320). ), special drawing 2 small hit pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) clear to 0 (A4
321) Do. After that, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is ended.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first starting winning hole 36, and the detection of the game ball at the normal variable winning device 37. The variable display game execution means executes the special figure 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on the above. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Example of special jackpot symbol distribution]
FIG. 28 is a table illustrating the distribution of jackpot types (jackpot symbol distribution) of the special symbol 1 and 2 variable display game controlled by the above-mentioned special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process and special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process. It is. Note that the distribution of jackpot types is common for each setting (each probability setting value).

FIG. 28 illustrates a table that defines the types of jackpots and their distribution rates corresponding to the jackpot stop symbol numbers acquired in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. In the example of FIG. 28, the types of jackpots are common to special chart 1 and 2 variable display games: 10R probability variable jackpot, 4R
There is a guaranteed variable jackpot and a 10R normal jackpot (100 time-savings). In addition, a 10R normal jackpot (time saving number of times: 0), etc. may be provided.

In addition, the distribution ratio of 10R definite strange jackpot, 4R definite strange jackpot, 10R normal jackpot (100 times of time saving) is 30%, 30%, 40% in special figure 1 variable display game, and in special figure 2 variable display game. The difference is 50%, 10%, and 40%. Note that the distribution rate can be changed as appropriate.

[Special drawing 1 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a fluctuation pattern selection information table (A4401
). Then, first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

Here, the first half offset data (variation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing first half fluctuations, and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing second half fluctuations. The first half fluctuation is the fluctuation mode before the start of reach.
The latter half fluctuation is a variation mode after reaching the reach state, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot (A4403), and if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a jackpot (the result of A4403 is "N"). ), in order to allocate the first half fluctuation according to the number of reserved special figures 1, the value is converted by adding the number of reserved special figures 1 to the first half offset data (A4404). Then, the process moves to step A4405.

If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot (A4403
(the result is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4405 without performing the process of step A4404 and without updating or converting the first half offset data acquired in step A4402.

Then, the gaming control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4405), and saves the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2).
) is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area of RWM (A4406), and the special figure 1 information setting process is ended.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3607b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is low and there is no time saving (state with no power supply support), that is, when the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is low and there is no time saving (normal game (A4501). If the special figure is low probability & no time saving (A
If the result of step A4501 is "Y"), the process moves to step A4505.

If the game control device 100 is not in the special drawing low probability & time saving mode (the result of A4501 is “N
''), that is, in the time saving state or the probability variable state, it is determined whether the special symbol variation display game to be started from now is the time saving final variation (A4502). The time shortening final variation is the final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in the time saving state. If the special figure variation display game to be started from now is the time reduction final variation (the result of A4502 is "Y"), the process moves to step A4506.

If the special figure variation display game to be started from now on is not the time reduction final variation (the result of A4502 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a variation pattern selection information table (A
4503). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As mentioned above, the first half offset data (variation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing first half fluctuations, and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing second half fluctuations. .

On the other hand, if the special pattern is low probability and there is no time saving (result of A4501 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the special pattern variation display game to be started is a high probability final variation. (A4505). Here, the high probability final variation is a special symbol variation display game when the player wins the falling lottery (FIG. 20) and falls from the probability variation state (high probability state) to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

The game control device 100 determines whether the special figure fluctuation display game to be started from now is a high probability final fluctuation (the result of A4505 is "Y") or if it is a time shortening final fluctuation (A450).
2 result is "Y"), in order to secure time to notify that it is the final fluctuation, first half offset data and second half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (A4506), and the process moves to step A4511. .

If the special figure fluctuation display game to be started from now on is not a high probability final fluctuation (the result of A4505 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a jackpot ( A4507). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a jackpot (A450
7 result is "N"), the first half offset data for the miss/small hit of the special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4508), and the process moves to step A4510. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot (the result of A4507 is "Y"), the first half offset data for the jackpot of the special figure 2 at low probability is set (A4509). Next, the second half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4510). As a result, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a long-time variation (long variation).

In addition, in the variable probability state (special pattern high probability state) and short time state, the second half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special pattern 2 variable display game is not set, so the special pattern 2 variable display game does not set the normal variation time fluctuation ( short fluctuations compared to long fluctuations). As a result, in the probability variable state (special pattern high probability state) and time saving state, a small win RUSH state in which small wins frequently occur is possible due to the special pattern 2 variable display game.

After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the gaming control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A451
1), save the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2) in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area of RWM (A4512), and end the special figure 2 information setting process.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (A3609a) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be explained. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

The gaming control device 100 first sets a variable group address table (A4601a
), obtains and prepares the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to fluctuation distribution information 2 (
A4602a), load the variable pattern random number 1 as a random number from the variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) of the special drawing 1 and prepare (A4603a).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a loss (A4604a). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a loss (A4604
The result of a is "Y"), and 2-byte distribution processing is executed based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (A4
605a), if the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not a loss (in the case of a jackpot or a small hit) (the result of A4604a is "N"), a distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606a). The 2-byte distribution process and the distribution process are processes for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing games, and the random number for distribution is 1 byte size for winning games, and 2 bytes for losing games. The winning size is set to 1 byte in order to save data capacity, but since the appearance rate of winning in the special figure 1 variable display game itself is low, 1 byte is sufficient. In addition, in the case of a hit (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605a or A4606a, the gaming control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the second half fluctuation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (A4607a). Next, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of the special drawing 1 (A4608a), and the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609a). . Then, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (A4610a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the second half variation number (second half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4611a),
Calculate the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4612a)
. Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613a). Further, the variable pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variable pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) of the special drawing 1 (A4614a), and the distribution process based on the variable pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the first half variation number (first half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3. be.

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 obtains the first half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution,
It is saved in the first half variation number area (A4616a), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is ended.

Through the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game will be set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (A3609b) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be explained. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

The special figure 2 variation pattern setting process replaces "special figure 1" in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (Figure 31) with "special figure 2", and is the same process as the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. , so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that steps A4601b to A4616b in the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process correspond to steps A4601a to A4616a in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, respectively.

Through the above processing, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting process (A3
610a, A3610b) will be explained in detail. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area (for reserved ball 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the used special figure 1 (A5001).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets the first half variation time value table (A5002) and obtains the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number (A5003). Furthermore, a second half fluctuation time value table is set (A5004), and a second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is obtained (
A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A500
6) Save the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5007). continue,
It is determined whether information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game is being set (A5008). If information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A5008 is "N"), special figure 2
Since information regarding the variable display game is being set, it is determined whether or not to start the long variation (long time variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5009).

If the game control device 100 does not start the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (A5009
result is "N"), save 0 in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A50
10) When starting the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (result of A5009 is "Y"),
Save 9 in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5011). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game, the predetermined number of repetitions (in this case 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to the number of repetitions in order to make the variation for a variation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not enough with a 2-byte timer. Set to area. Note that in timer interrupt processing with an interrupt period of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can be set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, by saving the above added value to the special figure game processing timer area, 60000ms
If a timer of ec (60 seconds) is set and 9 repetitions are saved,
The timer is decremented in the timer interrupt processing (especially the special figure 2 game processing (Figure 15)) (A3
304), when the time is up (the result of A3305 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 (A3307), and the long variable timer value of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is set again in the game processing timer (A3308). ). As a result, the long variation special figure 2 variation display game,
The long fluctuation time can be 60,000 msec+(60,000 msec×9)=10 minutes.

The variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game when it is not a long variation (number of repetitions = 0) are the first half variation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007. This is the sum of the time value and the second half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A50
08 result is "Y"), step A5012 is executed without setting the number of repetitions of the timer.
to move to.

After steps A5008, A5010, and A5011, the gaming control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5012), and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5013). . Then, a production command setting process for transmitting the variation command as a production command is executed (A5014).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the target special figure pending number (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started by -1 (A5015), and Shift the contents of the random number storage area related to the display game (A5016) and clear the free area after the shift (
A5017). Then, the variation start information setting process ends.

Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure variable display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination device that determines various random numbers stored in the startup storage device (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means that can determine a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in a variable display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special symbol variation display games. to set detailed performance contents in the decorative special figure variable display game. Information related to the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure reservation number command that includes information on the starting memory number (number of reservations), a decorative special figure command that includes information on stop symbols, and a change in the special figure fluctuation display game. Variation commands including information regarding patterns are included, and these commands are transmitted to the production control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the production control device 300 can proceed efficiently.

[Time reduction variation number update process]
Next, details of the time reduction variation frequency update processing (A3611a, A3611b) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure for updating the number of time reduction fluctuations.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (in a variable probability state).
A5101). When the special pattern high probability flag (in this embodiment, the special pattern high probability & time saving flag) is set in the special pattern game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special pattern is high probability.
When the special figure has a high probability (the result of A5101 is "Y"), the time reduction variation number update process is ended.

When the game control device 100 is not in the special figure high probability state (the result of A5101 is "N"), it determines whether or not it is in the special figure time saving state (in the time saving state) (A5102). When the time saving flag (in this embodiment, the special figure low probability & time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure time saving is in progress. If the special figure time is not being shortened (the result of A5102 is "N"), the time reduction variation number update process is ended.

The game control device 100 updates the number of time reduction fluctuations by -1 (subtracts by 1) when the special drawing time is being shortened (a state in which general electricity support is available with a low probability of special drawings) (the result of A5102 is "Y"). )
(A5103). In addition, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations is the number of fluctuations at which the time reduction state is maintained after the end of the jackpot, and is set to, for example, 100 times (Jackpot end setting process 2 described later)
. Also, when either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts changing, the number of time reduction changes is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (A5
104). If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (result of A5104 is "N"), that is,
If the time reduction state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 ends the time reduction variation number update process. When the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (A5104
If the result is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 saves the signal regarding the time-saving end in the external information output data area (A5105). Here, the signal regarding the time-saving end is the off data of the jackpot 2 signal. As a result, a signal regarding time-saving termination is sent to the external information terminal 71 as external information.
It is then output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 saves the signal regarding the time-saving end in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5106). The signals related to the time reduction end here are, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal,
These are the off data of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the off data of the normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number with low probability in the game state display number area (A
5107), save the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag in the special pattern game mode flag area of RWM (A5108), and save the general pattern no time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (A5108).
5109), the time reduction variation number update process ends.

In this way, by executing the time reduction variation number update process in the second embodiment, the time reduction state (state with low probability of special symbols and normal electricity support) can be appropriately changed from the normal gaming state (state with low probability of special symbols and normal electricity support). (without power support).

[Special figure 1 fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 fluctuation processing (A3211) in the special figure 1 game process will be explained. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation processing.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation number output number by +1 (A5301).
The symbol confirmation count output count is used in the symbol confirmation count signal editing process (part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol confirmation count signal generated when the stop symbol of the special pattern fluctuation display game is confirmed to an external device. be done. Next, load the decorative special figure 1 command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and prepare it as a production command (A5302), and execute the production command setting process (A5
303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as a production command (A5304), and a production command setting process is executed (A5
305).

Next, the game control device 100, as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1,
The display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 is set (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is a special symbol 1.
00msec, and if it is a jackpot symbol of special drawing 1, it is 2000msec.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a loss (A5307). If the result of the special pattern 1 variable display game is a loss (the result of A5307 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special pattern 1 stop symbol setting process (the stop symbol number at the time of a loss) is used as the special pattern 1 stop symbol. Load it from the evacuation area and save it to the special pattern 1 stop pattern area (A5
322).

If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a loss (in the case of a jackpot) (the result of A5307 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines that the special figure 2 is also changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed).
It is determined whether or not (A5308). When the special figure 2 is not changing (the result of A5308 is "N"), the process moves to step A5319. If special map 2 is also changing (A53
08 result is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 2 display process described later is being executed (A5
309).

When the special figure 2 display process is being executed (the result of A5309 is “
Y”), the process moves to step A5311. If the special figure 2 display process is not being executed (
The result of A5309 is "N"), and the symbol confirmation number output number is updated by +1 (A5310). Next, as the display time of special figure 2, set the display time of the value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of special figure 1 (display time of special figure 1 + 4 msec) (A5311), and display it in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of the timer interrupt process. The reason why 4 msec was added is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 2 game processing (A3304). Thereby, the actual display time of the stop symbols of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop symbols of the special figure 2 can be made to be the same. Note that if the stop display of special map 2 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically the display time will be extended, but it may be shortened depending on the case).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the missing symbol command of the decorative special figure 2 as a production command (A5313), saves it in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A5314), and executes the production command setting process ( A5315). Subsequently, a decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5317). Thereafter, the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 is executed to make settings for executing the special figure 2 displaying process (A5318). In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, save the process number "2" in the special figure 2 game process number area,
A process is executed to stop the special figure 2 variable display game when the result is a loss.

Through the processing from steps A5311 to A5318, the losing result of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 fluctuating process which is the control related to the special figure 1 variable display game. , Execution of special figure 2 display processing (end of special figure 2 variable display game)
is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (the special figure 2 is fluctuating), if the special figure 1 variable display game results in a hit (jackpot), the special figure 2 variable display game will be a loss. As a result, the fluctuation will be forcibly terminated (forced termination).

In addition, the process during special figure 1 fluctuation is performed when the fluctuation time ends, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) times out (in A3206). Since the result is "Y"), when the special pattern 1 variable display game of the winning result stops changing, the special pattern 2 variable display game is forced to end the variation (forced termination).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 1 command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saves it in the winning symbol command area (A5319). Next, load the round number upper limit value information from the above-mentioned special map 1 round number upper limit value information area, save it to the round number upper limit value information area (A5320), The winning opening opening information is loaded and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (A5321). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1 for making settings for executing the special figure 1 displaying process is executed (A5323), and the special figure 1 changing process is ended. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, you can save the process number "2" in the special figure 1 game process number area, execute the process to stop the special figure 1 variable display game, etc. Perform the necessary processing to move on to processing.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) that sets a stop time (display time) for displaying a stop result mode of a variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 is running the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (while the special figure 2 is changing).
Even so, when the special figure 1 variable display game results in a winning result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated with a losing result.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation processing (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be explained. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation processing.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation number output number by +1 (A5401).
The symbol confirmation count output count is used in the symbol confirmation count signal editing process (part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol confirmation count signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is confirmed to an external device. . Next, the decorative special figure 2 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and prepared as a production command (A5402), and the production command setting process is executed (A540).
3). Thereafter, a decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as a production command (A5404), and a production command setting process is executed (A540).
5).

Next, the game control device 100, as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2,
The display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 is set (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is the outlier symbol of special pattern 2.
00 msec, 600 msec for the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol, and 136 msec for the small winning pattern of the special pattern 2. In addition, the display time of the losing symbol and the jackpot symbol of the special symbol 2 are the same, but is longer than the display time of the small winning symbol of the special symbol 2.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a loss (A5407). If the result of the special pattern 2 variable display game is a loss (the result of A5407 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special pattern 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is used as the special pattern 2 stop symbol. Load it from the evacuation area and save it to the special pattern 2 stop pattern area (A5
427).

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a loss (A5407
(the result is "N"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is also being executed) (A5408). When the special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A5408 is "N"), the process moves to step A5423. If special figure 1 is also changing (result of A5408 is “Y”)
”), it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot (A5409).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a jackpot, the game control device 100 (A540
If the result of 9 is "N"), that is, it is a small hit, set the special figure 1 game interruption flag (
A5412), prepares a special decoration map 1 interruption command as a production command (A5413), and executes production command setting processing (A5414). Thereafter, the process moves to step A5423. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (the special figure 1 is fluctuating), if the special figure 2 variable display game hits a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game will change to the special figure 1 variable display game. The process is interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time by the processing timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stopped symbol corresponding to the stopped symbol number) is postponed, and after the small winning operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game ends, the suspended special figure 1 You can restart the variable display game.

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot, the game control device 100 (A540
9 result is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display process described later is being executed (A54
10). If the special figure 1 display process is being executed (the result of A5410 is "Y"), the process moves to step A5415. If the special figure 1 display process is not being executed (the result of A5410 is "N"), the symbol confirmation number output count is updated by +1 (A5411). Next, as the display time of special figure 1, add 4 msec to the display time of special figure 2 (display time of special figure 2 + 4 msec)
c) The display time is set (A5415), and the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5416). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of the timer interrupt process. The reason for adding 4 msec is because the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 1 game processing (A3205
), which is an extra addition. Thereby, the actual display time of the stop symbols of the special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbols of the special figure 1 can be made to be the same. Note that if the stop display of special map 1 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically the display time will be extended, but it may be shortened depending on the case).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the missing symbol command of the decorative special figure 1 as a production command (A5417), saves it in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A5418), and executes the production command setting process (A5417). A5419). Subsequently, a decorative special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5421). Thereafter, special figure 1 displaying process transition setting processing 2 is executed to make settings for executing the special figure 1 displaying process (A5422). In special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, save the process number "2" in the special figure 1 game process number area,
A process is executed to stop the special figure 1 variable display game when the result is a loss.

Through the processing from steps A5415 to A5422, the losing result of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 variable process which is the control related to the special figure 2 variable display game. , Execution of special figure 1 display processing (end of special figure 1 variable display game)
is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (the special figure 1 is fluctuating), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a jackpot, the special figure 1 variable display game will be forcibly canceled due to the loss result. The variation ends (execution ends) at .

In addition, the process during special figure 2 fluctuation is performed at the end of the fluctuation time, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times out (results of A3305 and A3306). is executed as "Y"), when the special figure 2 variable display game of the winning result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated (execution ends).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 2 command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saves it in the winning symbol command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5424). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5424 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (the stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) is displayed in the special figure 2. It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (if it is a jackpot) (the result of A5424 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the above-mentioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit value information area (A5425),
The big winning hole opening information is loaded from the aforementioned special drawing 2 big winning hole opening information area and saved in the big winning hole opening information area (A5426). Thereafter, the information saved in the above-mentioned special pattern 2 stopping pattern setting process (stopping pattern number at the time of jackpot) is loaded from the special pattern 2 stopping pattern saving area and saved in the special pattern 2 stopping pattern area (A5427). Next, the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 for making settings for executing the special figure 2 displaying process is executed (A5428), and the special figure 2 changing process is ended. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, the process number "2" is entered in the special figure 2 game process number area.
Performs necessary processing to move to special figure 2 display processing, such as saving and stopping the special figure 2 variable display game.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) that sets a stop time (display time) for displaying a stop result mode of a variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 is running the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (while the special figure 1 is changing).
Even so, when the special figure 2 variable display game has a winning result, a forced termination means is provided for forcibly ending the special figure 1 variable display game with a losing result.

[Special drawing 1 display processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process (A3212) in the special figure 1 game process will be explained. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 display processing.

The game control device 100 first extracts the jackpot flag 1 (jackpot information,
or (indicating loss information) is loaded (A5701), and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (A5702). Next, it is determined whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot based on the jackpot flag 1 (A5703).

If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot (A5703), the game control device 100
If the result is "Y"), the signal related to the start of the special chart 1 jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5704). For example, the signals related to the start of the special symbol 1 jackpot are the ON data of the condition device operating signal and the ON data of the special symbol 1 hit signal.

Next, the gaming control device 100 loads the winning symbol command from the winning symbol command area and prepares it as a production command (A5705), and executes production command setting processing (A57).
06). In addition, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot, this winning symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol. Subsequently, a jackpot fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5708).

After that, the gaming control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5709). The signals here include the on data (on signal) of the jackpot 2 signal and the on data (on signal) of the jackpot 3 signal. In addition, in this embodiment, there is no 2R jackpot, so it is irrelevant, but the jackpot 2 signal may be turned off by a 2R probability variable jackpot with a low probability, and the jackpot 3 signal may be turned off by a 2R probability variable jackpot with a high probability. You may.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (A5710), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special drawing 1 game processing timer area (A5711).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets "3" as the processing number in order to move to the fanfare/interval processing (A5712), saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5713), and starts the fanfare/interval processing. / Executes the mid-interval process transition setting process (
A5714), the special figure 1 display process ends.

In the fanfare/interval process transition setting process, a process for transitioning to fanfare/interval process is executed. Specifically, as signals related to the start of the jackpot, the on data (on signal) of the jackpot 1 signal and the on data (on signal) of the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. Also, a signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area, and a special pattern low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area. Furthermore, the time reduction fluctuation number area that holds the number of time reduction fluctuations is cleared. Additionally, the round number area is cleared to 0.

On the other hand, if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a jackpot (the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot) (the result of A5703 is "N"), the game control device 100 will control the result of the special figure 1 variable display game. If it is a loss, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed this time is a high probability final fluctuation (A5715). High probability final variation is a special figure variation display game when winning the falling lottery (FIG. 20). If it is not a high probability final variation (the result of A5715 is "N"), it is determined whether the special symbol 1 variation display game executed this time is a time shortening final variation (A5716). The time shortening final variation is the final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in the time saving state. If it is not the time shortening final variation (A5716 result is “N”),
The process moves to step A5724.

The gaming control device 100 issues a probability information command indicating a low probability (low Probability) is prepared as a production command (A5717), and production command setting processing is executed (A5718). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area (A5719), and the left-handed hitting instruction notification flag is cleared (A5720).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5721). If it is a small hit state in the special figure 2 variable display game (result of A5721 is "Y"), step A5
The process moves to step 724.

If the special figure 2 variable display game is not in a small hit state (the result of A5721 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (A5
722). Next, the second game state display section 56 (lamp D8) notifying that it is time to play right-handed.
-D10), save the number in the left-handed state in the game status display number 2 area (A5723), and clear the special figure 1 changing status in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5
724). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a loss, in order to move to the special figure 1 normal process, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 1 normal process, and in the special figure 1 game process number area. Save the processing number (A5725). Then, the process during display of special figure 1 is ended.

[Special drawing 2 display processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process (A3314) in the special figure 2 game process will be explained. FIG. 38A and FIG. 38B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special figure 2 display processing. FIG. 38A shows the first half of the special figure 2 displaying process, and FIG. 38B shows the second half of the special figure 2 displaying process.

The game control device 100 first selects the small hit flag 2 (small hit information,
or (indicating loss information) is loaded (A5801), and the small hit flag 2 area is cleared (A5802). Next, from the jackpot flag 2 area, jackpot flag 2 (jackpot information or
(indicating loss information) (A5803) and clears the jackpot flag 2 area (A5
804). Next, it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot based on the jackpot flag 2 (A5805).

The game control device 100 determines if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot (A5805
If the result is "Y"), the signal related to the start of the special chart 2 jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). For example, the signals related to the start of the special symbol 2 jackpot are the ON data of the condition device operating signal and the ON data of the special symbol 2 hit signal.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the winning symbol command from the winning symbol command area and prepares it as a production command (A5807), and executes production command setting processing (A58).
08). In addition, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot, this winning symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol. Subsequently, a jackpot fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5809), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5810).

After that, the gaming control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5811). The signals here include ON data of the jackpot 2 signal and ON data of the jackpot 3 signal. In addition, in this embodiment, there is no 2R jackpot, so it is irrelevant, but the jackpot 2 signal may be turned off by a 2R probability variable jackpot with a low probability, and the jackpot 3 signal may be turned off by a 2R probability variable jackpot with a high probability. You may.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (A5812), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5813). Then, "3" is set as the processing number in order to proceed to the fanfare/interval processing (A5814).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5
815), executes fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (A5816),
The special figure 2 display process ends. The fanfare/interval process transition setting process is the same as that executed within the special figure 1 display process.

On the other hand, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a jackpot (A5
805 result is "N"), it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 2 (whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit or not) ( A5817). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5817 is "Y"), it is determined whether the currently executed special figure 2 variable display game is a high probability final variation (A5818). If it is not a high probability final variation (the result of A5818 is "N"), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a time shortening final variation (A5819). If it is not the time reduction final variation (the result of A5819 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5824 without performing the processes of steps A5820 to A5823.

The game control device 100 determines that if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time is a high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5818 is "Y") or if it is a time shortening final fluctuation (the result of A5819 is "Y"). ”), a probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is prepared as an effect command (A5820), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5821).

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the power outage recovery transmission command area of the RWM (A5822), and clears the left-handed hitting instruction notification flag (A58).
23). Thereafter, a winning symbol command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared as a production command (A5824), and production command setting processing is executed (A5825). In addition,
Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small win, this winning symbol command corresponds to the small winning symbol.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the small hit fanfare command as a production command (A5826), and executes production command setting processing (A5827). Then, the signal related to the right-handed batting instruction (on data of firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5828), and the second game status display section 56 (lamp D
8-D10), the number in the right-handed game state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5829).

Next, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 opens the lower large prize opening with a small hit.
Clear the area for the number of fraudulent winnings from the lower major winning opening (A5830), save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the lower major winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5831), and execute the special drawing 2 small win fanfare mid-process transition setting process. (A5832), and the special figure 2 display process ends. In addition, although the big prize opening is opened by a small hit, the screen of the display device 41 does not need to be changed.

In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, a process for transitioning to the special figure 2 small win fanfare medium process is executed. Specifically, "7" is set as the processing number in order to move to the small win fanfare middle processing, and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Further, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, and the signal related to the start of the small hit (ON data of the jackpot 1 signal) is saved in the external information output data area. Further, a signal related to the start of special symbol 2 small winning (on data of special symbol 2 small winning signal) is saved in the test signal output data area, and small winning information is saved in the special pattern status area.

On the other hand, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5817 is "N"), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game If the result is a loss, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed this time is a high probability final fluctuation (A5833). If it is not a high probability final variation (the result of A5833 is "N"), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a time shortening final variation (A5834). If it is not the time shortening final variation (the result of A5834 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5840 without performing the processes of steps A5835 to A5839.

The gaming control device 100 issues the probability information command (
(low probability) is prepared as a production command (A5835), and production command setting processing is executed (A5836). Subsequently, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area (A5837), and a signal related to the left-handed batting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays the second game state display section 5 that notifies that it is time to play right-handed.
6 (lamp D8-D10), save the number in the left-handed state in the game status display number 2 area (A5839), and clear the special figure 2 fluctuating in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5840). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a failure, in order to move to the special figure 2 normal process, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 2 normal process, and the special figure 1
Save the process number in the game process number area (A5841). Then, the special figure 2 display process ends.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Next, details of the fanfare/interval processing (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be explained. 39A and 39B are flowcharts illustrating the procedure of fanfare/interval processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the remaining ball counters for counting the remaining balls of the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 are 0 (A6001). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (the result of A6001 is "N"), the fanfare/interval process is ended.
When the remaining ball counter is 0 (result of A6001 is "Y"). It is determined whether or not it is the first jackpot round (A6002). If it is not the first jackpot round (A600
2), the process moves to step A6010.

When it is the first jackpot round (the result of A6002 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100
”), it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34 (A6003). If no game ball passes through the normal figure starting gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "N"), the fanfare/interval process is ended. That is, right-handed hitting is started and the normal pattern starting gate 34 is reached.
Processing related to jackpots (such as processing during opening of the jackpot) does not proceed until the game ball passes through.

The game control device 100 controls when a game ball passes through the normal figure starting gate 34 (A600).
If the result of step 3 is "Y"), that is, right-handed hitting has started, information regarding the start of the jackpot is set (A6004-A6009). First, set the round number upper limit table (
A6004), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table, and is saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (A6005). In this embodiment, the upper limit values for the number of rounds are 10R and 4R.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 acquires the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information of the round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table, and saves it in the round LED pointer area of RWM (A6006). Then, in this embodiment, since the upper-level winning opening is opened by a jackpot, the upper-level winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (A6007), and the R
Save the out-of-fraud monitoring period flag in the WM University University winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A600
8) Save the ON output data of the operating signal of the accessory continuous operating device in the test signal output data area (A6009).

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the number of rounds area by +1 (A601
0). Note that the number of rounds in the round number area is cleared to 0 in the fanfare/interval process transition setting process, so it becomes 0 before the start of the current jackpot operation.
Thereafter, a round command corresponding to the big prize opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared as a performance command (A6011), and a performance command setting process is executed (A6012).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves it in the jackpot processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6014). Here, if the pattern is to repeat opening and closing of the big prize opening during one round, set 0 as the initial value, and if the pattern is to open the big winning opening only once during one round, the initial value will be suddenly set to the upper limit. Set the value (=21). In addition, in the case of a pattern that repeats opening and closing, the initial value does not need to be 0, but may be a value greater than 0 and less than the upper limit (i.e.,
start from an intermediate value). Next, the big winning hole opening time corresponding to the big winning hole opening information and the number of rounds is set (A6015).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether it is a lever solenoid operation round that operates the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 (V winning hole) (A60
16). In this embodiment, the lever solenoid operation round is jackpot round 1 (first jackpot round).

If it is a lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b (A6017). Here, the lever solenoid is set so that the specific area 86 is opened for a long time in the case of a variable probability jackpot (10R or 4R probability variable jackpot) and in a short time (very short time) in the case of a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot). 86b operation data is set. Specifically, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to 0. On the other hand, if it is not the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is "N"), stop data for the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets the processing number as “
4" (A6019), and determines whether it is a jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game (
A6020). If it is a jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6020 is "Y")
This processing number is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing number area (A6021), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing timer area (A6022). If it is not a jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6020 is "N"), save this processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and set the special figure 2 game processing timer for the opening time of the special figure 2 game. Save to area (A6024).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of opening of the big winning hole (on data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the big winning hole solenoid of RWM. Save the upper limit winning hole ON data that turns on the upper limit winning hole solenoid 39b (largest winning hole solenoid 2) in the data area (A6026), clear the larger winning hole count number (A6027), and process during fanfare/interval. end.

In addition, in this embodiment, there is only a jackpot that opens only the upper large winning hole, but two types of jackpot that opens only the upper large winning hole and a jackpot that opens only the lower large winning hole may be provided,
It is also possible to provide a jackpot that opens both the upper and lower prize openings.

[Special drawing 1 jackpot end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3216) in the special figure 1 game process will be explained. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 1 jackpot end processing.

The gaming control device 100 first executes a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data (A6101). If the time reduction judgment data indicates that there is no time reduction, jackpot end setting processing 1 is executed in order to transition to the normal gaming state after the jackpot ends (A6102), and if the time reduction judgment data indicates that there is a time reduction, the jackpot is executed. After the end, jackpot end setting process 2 is executed in order to shift to the time saving state (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether there is specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning hole) (A6104). In addition, as mentioned above, in jackpot round 1 (first jackpot round) in the case of a probability variable jackpot (10R or 4R probability variable jackpot), the specific area 86 is left open for a long time (A6017), and the specific area switch 72 is set to the specific area. The passage of the game ball to 86 (V winning) is almost certainly detected (regular passage in a specific area). Then, when there is a detection signal from the specific area switch 72, the game control device 100 transmits specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed to the specific area 86 (V winning) to the RA.
It can be saved in M.

In addition, even in jackpot round 1 in the case of a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot), the specific area 86
Although it is only opened for a very short time, the specific area switch 72 can sometimes detect the accidental passage of the game ball (V winning hole) to the specific area 86 (V winning hole) (specific area irregular passage).
Also in this case, the gaming control device 100 can store the specific area passage information in the RAM.

The game control device 100, if there is no specific area passage information (the result of A6104 is "N")
, the process moves to step A6106. On the other hand, if there is specific area passage information (A61
04 result is "Y"), the jackpot end setting process 3 is executed in order to shift to the probability variable state (probability variable state) after the jackpot ends (A6105). In this case, the data set in the jackpot end setting process 3 will be overwritten on the data set in the jackpot end setting process 1 and 2, and the data set in the jackpot end setting process 1 and 2 will be invalidated. Become.

Next, the gaming control device 100 loads the probability information command from the power outage recovery transmission command area (A6106). In addition, in the jackpot end setting process 1-3, a probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a low probability or high probability probability state or time saving state is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there has been irregular passage of the specific area (A6107). As mentioned above, irregular passage through a specific area (abnormal passage through a specific area) is
In the case of a normal jackpot, the game ball passes through the specific area 86, and regular passage of the specific area (normal passage of the specific area) refers to the game ball passing through the specific area 86 in the case of a variable jackpot. . For example, if specific area passage information occurs in the case of a normal jackpot, it can be determined that there has been an irregular passage of the specific area. Note that even if there is not only regular passage through the specific area but also irregular passage through the specific area, the state shifts to a variable probability state (probability variable state) after the jackpot ends.

When there is irregular passage through the specific area (the result of A6107 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 adds irregular probability change information to the loaded probability information command and includes it (A6108), and uses this probability information. A production command setting process is executed to set the command as a production command (A6109). On the other hand, if there is no irregular passage through the specific area (the result of A6107 is "N"), a production command setting process is executed so that the loaded probability information command is set as a production command as it is (A6109).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special drawing 1 normal processing (A6110), and saves the processing number in the special drawing 1 game processing number area (A6111).
. Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (A611
2). The signals related to the end of the jackpot here are the off data of the jackpot 1 signal and the off data of the jackpot 3 signal.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6113). The signals related to the end of the jackpot here are, for example, off data of the condition device operation signal, off data of the accessory continuous operation device operation signal, off data of the special symbol 1 hit signal, and off data of the special symbol 2 win signal. It is.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the unlit number in the round LED pointer area (A6114). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6115), and the special drawing status area is cleared (A6116). Thereafter, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6117), and the special figure 1 jackpot end process is ended.

This special figure 2 game wait time value is used to determine the start of fluctuation of the forcibly terminated special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing), and the next timer interrupt processing (Figure 7). It is set to delay the time. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec, which is twice the interrupt period (that is, the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area is 2).

If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game process (A1313 in FIG. 7) that is performed immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (A1313 in FIG. At A1314 in Figure 7), the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game starts (starts within the current timer interrupt processing), so the special figure 2 variable display game is changed from the special figure 1 variable display game. This may cause a problem as it will have to be started first. In addition, in the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set, so it remains at 0. Therefore, regarding the determination of the start of variation in the special figure 1 variation display game, the next timer interrupt processing (special figure 1
This is done in special figure 1 (normal processing) during game processing.

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to twice the interrupt period (8 msec), but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (starts within the current timer interrupt process) ), the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further -
1 update (reduction of 4 msec) and becomes 0 (result of A3305 is "Y"), and determination of start of variation of special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) is performed. . As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the jackpot state due to the special figure 1 variable display game, the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 variable display game) 2 game processing) is performed and the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing at the same time. In addition, as mentioned above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the jackpot state, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a losing symbol (either forced to end or not originally changing).

In addition, if there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game starts before the special figure 1 variable display game after the jackpot state ends, the process of step A6717 is omitted and the special figure 2 variable display game is started earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game. Figure 2 It is not necessary to set the game wait time value.

[Special drawing 2 jackpot end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 jackpot end process (A3318) in the special figure 2 game process will be explained. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 2 jackpot end processing.

Steps A6201 to A6216 of the special figure 2 jackpot end process are the ones in which "special figure 1" in steps A6101 to A6116 of the special figure 1 jackpot end process are replaced with "special figure 2". Processing similar to processing steps A6101 to A6116 is performed, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

In addition, in the special figure 2 jackpot end process, there is no need to provide a special figure 1 game wait time value. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain at 0, and in the next timer interrupt processing, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will start. If the determination (in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process) is made and the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will start changing at the same time. This is because it can be done.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
Next, jackpot end setting process 1 (A6102, A62
02) will be explained in detail. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

The gaming control device 100 first saves a signal related to the start of no time saving state (no time saving) in the external information output data area (A6301). Here, the signal related to the start without the time saving state is the off data of the jackpot 2 signal. A signal related to the start without a time-saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302). Here, the signals related to the start without a time-saving state are the off data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the off data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the off data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and the off data of the special symbol 2 variation These are off data of the time reduction state signal, off data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and off data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number with no time saving state in the game state display number area (A6303), and saves the no time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (A6
304), save the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag in the special pattern game mode flag area (A
6305). The general figure time saving non-flag indicates that the normal figure variable display game is not in a time shortening variation state (time saving state, general power support state). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of a jackpot is low and it is not in a time saving state (general power support state).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction variation number area to 0 (A6306),
A signal related to left-handed batting instruction (for example, off data of firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6307). Then, in order to turn off the right-handed game display LED (first game status display section 57), the number indicating left-handed game status is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A6308), and the number is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area. The probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is saved (A6309), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended.

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
Next, jackpot end setting process 2 (A6103, A62
03) will be explained in detail. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot end setting process 2.

The gaming control device 100 first saves the signal regarding the start of time saving in the external information output data area (A6501). Here, the signal regarding the start of time saving is the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal. In addition, the on data of the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area at the start of the jackpot fanfare (A5709, A5811), and the on data of the jackpot 2 signal continues from the jackpot to the external information terminal 71. Eventually, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the time saving state (with time saving) in the test signal output data area (A6502). Here, the signals related to the start of the time saving state are OFF data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, OFF data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, ON data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, special symbol 2 variation These are ON data of the time reduction state signal, ON data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and ON data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number indicating that there is a time reduction state in the game state display number area (A6503), and saves the number indicating that there is a time reduction state in the general pattern game mode flag area (A
6504), save the special pattern low probability & time saving flag in the special pattern game mode flag area (
A6505). The general map time reduction flag indicates that the general map variable display game is in a time shortening variation state (time saving state, general power support state). The special figure low probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a jackpot is low and the time saving state (general power support state).

Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value (for example, 100) in the time reduction variation number area that stores the time reduction variation number (A6506), and saves the probability indicating that the time reduction state is in the time reduction state in the power outage recovery transmission command area. The information command (time saving) is saved (A6507) and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended.

It should be noted that since this is a right-handed hitting state in which right-handed hitting is advantageous in the jackpot state, settings regarding right-handed hitting are not performed in the jackpot end setting process 2.

[Jackpot end setting process 3]
Next, jackpot end setting process 3 (A6105, A62
05) will be explained in detail. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 3.

The gaming control device 100 first saves the signal regarding the start of time saving in the external information output data area (A6801). Here, the signal regarding the start of time saving is the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal. In addition, the on data of the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area at the start of the jackpot fanfare (A5709, A5811), and the on data of the jackpot 2 signal continues from the jackpot to the external information terminal 71. Eventually, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (A6802). Here, the signals related to the start of high probability & time saving are on data of special symbol 1 high probability state signal, on data of special symbol 2 high probability state signal, on data of special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 is the ON data of the variable time reduction state signal.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the number with time-saving state in the game state display number area (A6803), and saves the special symbol high probability & time-saving flag in the special symbol game mode flag region (A6804). The special figure high probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a jackpot is high and the game is in a time saving state (here, a state in which the time saving variation of the special figure variation display game is executed).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the ON data of the firing position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A6805). Then, in order to light up the right-handed game display LED (first game status display section 57), the number indicating right-handed game status is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A6806), and the number is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area. The probability information command (high probability) indicating a high probability is saved (A6807), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is ended.

[Small win fanfare process]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare process (A3319) in the special figure 2 game process will be explained. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small win fanfare process.

The gaming control device 100 first prepares a small winning opening command for opening the lower large prize opening as an effect command (A6901), and executes an effect command setting process (A6902). next,
Set "8" as the processing number (A6903), save the processing number in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (A6904), and set the small winning opening time (for example 1600) as the opening time of the lower large prize opening.
msec) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6905).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of the small winning operation (on data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6906), and saves it in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Save the Lower University winning opening data (A6907). As a result, in the case of a small win in the special figure 2 variable display game, the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened.

Next, the game control device 100 controls the count switch of the big winning opening (lower big winning opening switch 38
A and/or the large winning opening count number area that stores the count number (detection number) of the large winning opening switch 39a) is cleared (A6908), and the process during the small winning fanfare is ended.

In this embodiment, there is only a small winning opening pattern in which the big winning opening opens only once, but there may be a small winning opening pattern in which the big winning opening repeatedly opens and closes. Also, the processing number is “8”.
By setting ``, it is possible to shift to the small win medium process after the small win fanfare medium process is completed.

[Special drawing 2 small hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3322) in the special figure 2 game process will be explained. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit termination process.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special drawing 2 normal processing (
A7301), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7302). Next, save the signal regarding the end of the small win (off data of the special symbol 2 small win signal) in the test signal output data area (A7303), and save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7304). Furthermore, the off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7305), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7306).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is in a low probability state and in a state with no time saving (state without general electricity support), that is, in a state where the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is low and there is no time saving (normal (in a gaming state) is determined (A7307). If it is not during the special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (result of A7307 is "N"), processing from step A7310 is executed.

The game control device 100 performs (A
The result of 7307 is "Y"), the signal related to the left-handed batting instruction (off data of firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7308), and the number in the left-handed batting state is saved in the game status display number 2 area. is saved (A7309), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (A7310).

When the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (result of A7310 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure 1 restart command as a production command (A7311), and executes production command setting processing. (A7312). The production control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. After that, special map 1
The game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313), and the special drawing 2 small hit ending process is ended. If the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (the result of A7310 is "N"), clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area without preparing a decorative special figure 1 restart command (A7313),
Finish the special figure 2 small hit end process

In addition, for the same reason as the special figure 2 big hit termination process (FIG. 41), it is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit termination process.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (processing) that the production control device 300 executes using the production control program will be explained.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main processing executed by the production control device 300 will be explained. Figure 47
is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the production control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (performance microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the production control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B*****".

When execution of the main process is started, the production control device 300 first prohibits interruptions (
B0001). Next, execute the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 (B0002, B
0003), and enable interrupts (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the gaming control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 becomes executable.

Next, the production control device 300 allows generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 etc. (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the production control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0
008). The WDT is started with the CPU initialization (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
monitor whether it is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period has elapsed, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the production control device 300 uses a RTC (real-time clock) 3 as a timekeeping means.
38 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every minute), and there is no need to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. Alternatively, the RTC reading process may be executed only once when the production control device 300 is powered on (that is, the gaming machine 10 is powered on) (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003). and B0004). The production control device 300 sets a timer (timekeeping means) that measures time in a timer area in the RAM, and reads the time from the RTC 338 only once when reading time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on. When reading the information, the timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338. The production control device 300 may execute various processes using a timer instead of the RTC 338. In this way, the number of times the time is read from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In addition, in the RTC reading process, if the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, etc.), a predetermined effect may be executed. The player can estimate the set value from the time interval by drawing a lottery with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, the selection rate for long time intervals may be drawn such that the larger the set value, the smaller the selection rate. In addition, by randomly selecting an execution period for executing a predetermined performance with a probability according to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined performance. For example, the selection rate for a long execution period may be drawn such that the selection rate increases as the set value increases.

Next, the performance control device 300 detects an operation signal of the performance button 25 by the player (a signal from the performance button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), and changes the performance content (setting) according to the detected signal. Performance button input processing is executed (B0010). continue,
Hall/player setting mode processing is executed to accept operations such as changing the brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and volume by the person in charge of the gaming hall (gaming parlor), the players, etc. (B0011). In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the performance according to the performance points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for adding and clearing production points (B0012). In the performance point control process, performance points are added when a performance or operation for which performance points are added is executed, and at the end of a game, etc., so that performance points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on performance points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the production control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process. Note that by drawing the value (additional value) to be added to the performance points at a probability according to the setting value, the player can estimate the setting value from the addition value. For example, the lottery may be performed such that the selection rate for a large additional value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the production control device 300 executes a random number update process to update random numbers such as production random numbers (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the gaming control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Note that details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data according to the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer, etc. The effect display editing process is executed (B0015). If the drawing data set at this time allows the VDP 312 to complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec), the image on the display device 41 can be updated without any problem. Then, preparation for drawing to the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation completion setting is executed (B0016).

Subsequently, the production control device 300 determines whether it is frame switching timing (B
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "Y"), the process to the display device 41 is Instruct screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, if periodic V blanking (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame period), frames are switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60 seconds, but the interval may be further increased.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 executes a sound control process to control the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process that controls decoration devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 executes a movable body control process to control production devices (board production device 44, frame production device) such as electric accessories driven by motors and solenoids (B002
1). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory motion effect that drives a motor is set.

Then, after completing the process of B0021 described above, the production control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. Thereafter, the processes from B0008 to B0021 are repeated.

[Received command check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of commands received in order to check the number of commands received from the gaming control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of commands received is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the gaming control device 100 (result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, if the number of received commands is not 0, that is, if a command is being received from the gaming control device 100 (result of B1102 is "Y"), the production control device 300 registers the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of commands received (B1103
), copies the contents of the receive command buffer in RAM to the command area for analysis (B11
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Furthermore, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds by 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The receive command buffer stores 32 received commands.
It is structured so that you can save up to 100 pieces. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the received commands are read out in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command reading index is cleared.

The production control device 300 determines whether copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 has been completed (B1106), and if the copying has not been completed (the result of B1106 is "N"). ”), the processes from steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the production control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. The received command buffer can store 32 commands, but the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area in the received command buffer without directly analyzing it, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands.

Subsequently, the production control device 300 determines that when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”).
]), loads the received command content in the command area for analysis (B1107), and executes received command analysis processing to analyze the content (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 has been completed (B1110), and if the analysis has not been completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the step The processes from B1107 to B1110 are repeated. If the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process ends.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 49 shows the production control device 30
2 is a flowchart showing the procedure of received command analysis processing executed by the computer.

The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). The commands sent from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 include the MODE section (MODE command) and the A
The command consists of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted successively from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower orders of the received command are M
The ODE section and the ACTION section are configured in this order.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section is within the normal range (B12
02). That is, it is determined whether the MODE section indicating the type of command has a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE section is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION section is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether the ACTION part indicating the content of the command (specific production instructions, etc.) has a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
The result is "Y"), and it is further determined whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is "Y"), command processing according to the command system is executed in processing from B1205 onwards.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the value of the MODE section is within the range of the variable command (B1205). Incidentally, the variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the special decoration design, and includes a variation command (set in the variation start information setting process). And MODE
If the part represents a variable command (result of B1205 is "Y"), variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a variable command, the production control device 300 (B12
05 result is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the hit type command (B
1207). In addition, the winning commands are commands that command operations related to the performance during the winning (displaying the fanfare screen or round screen, etc.). Interval command (set during interval opening process), Ending command (set during large winning opening opening process), Small hit fanfare command, Small winning opening command (small winning round command), These include a small winning end screen command (small winning ending command). If the MODE section represents a winning command (result of B1207 is "Y"), winning command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a winning command, the production control device 300 (B12
07 result is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the symbol-related command (B
1209). Note that the symbol-related commands include a decorative special figure 1 command and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. And, if the MODE part represents a symbol-related command (
The result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol-related command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a symbol-related command, the production control device 300 (B12
09 result is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B
1211). If the MODE section represents a single-shot command (result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a single-shot command, the production control device 300 executes (B12
11 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (B1213). The prefetch symbol-based commands include a prefetch stop symbol command. If the MODE section represents a prefetch symbol type command (result of B1213 is "Y"), prefetch symbol type command processing is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is ended. In addition, if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a low probability state, the prefetching stop symbol command (low probability) is used to execute the prefetching symbol type command processing, and if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a high probability state, the prefetching is stopped. Pre-read symbol command processing may be executed using a stop symbol command (low probability).

If the MODE section does not represent a prefetch symbol-related command, the production control device 300 (
The result of B1213 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section is within the range of the prefetch variable command (B1215). The lookahead variation commands include lookahead variation pattern commands. If the MODE part represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "
Y''), executes prefetch variable command processing (B1216), and ends the received command analysis processing.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a prefetch variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the production control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or if the AC to the MODE part is
Even if the combination of TION parts is not correct (the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section represents a model specification command (result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing is executed to set the type of gaming machine (B
1302), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a model specification command, the production control device 300 (B1
301 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command, then (
The result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization, etc. is executed (B1304), and the one-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (B1305). ). If the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (B13
05 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot command process is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a power outage recovery command, the production control device 300 (B1
305 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents a customer waiting demonstration command (B1307). If the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B130
7 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command process is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a customer waiting demo command, the production control device 300 executes (B
1307 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (B1309). Then, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310),
Terminates one-shot command processing.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (result of B1311 is "Y"), special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131
2) End the one-shot command processing.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
313 is "Y"), probability information setting processing is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a probability information command, the production control device 300 (B1
313 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents an error/invalid command (B1315). Note that the error/illegal commands include, for example, a fraud occurrence command, a fraud cancellation command, a status OFF command, and a status ON command. As status-on commands, the generation of a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error) or the generation of a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) (main frame open error, front frame There is a command that indicates the release error). Further, the status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

If the MODE part represents an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing is executed to notify or cancel notification of error or fraud (
B1316), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE section does not represent an error/invalid command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the production control device 300 then outputs a command for switching the production mode (special figure display processing). (B1317). If the MODE section represents a command for switching the production mode (result of B1317 is "Y"), production mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the one-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a command for switching the production mode (result of B1317 is "N"), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section indicates an out pitch number command indicating the number of out pitches. It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, when the MODE part represents the out pitch count command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out pitch count reception process is executed (B1
320), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE section does not represent the number of out pitches command, the production control device 300 executes (B
1319 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents a count command (big winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE section represents a command for counting the big prize opening switch (result of B1321 is "Y"), count information setting processing is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a count command, the production control device 300 (B
1321), it is determined whether the MODE section represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The setting value information command is executed in step A of FIG. 6B.
It is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1046 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. When the MODE part represents a setting value information command, (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the setting value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing is ended. In the setting value reception process, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting value information command, the production control device 300 executes (B
1323), it is determined whether the MODE section represents a setting change command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, the command (A
1030). If the MODE part represents a setting change command (B13
25 is "Y"), the setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change information setting process, the content of the setting change command is stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change information setting process, a setting changing indication is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being changed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command, the production control device 300 (
If the result of B1325 is "N"), it is determined whether the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (B1327). As a setting confirmation command, for example, the command while confirming probability settings (
A1033). If the MODE part represents a setting confirmation command (B1
327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation type information setting process is executed (B1328), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting confirmation information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command to confirm probability settings is received, in the setting confirmation information setting process, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that settings are being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (B1329). In addition, the pattern stop command includes, for example, a pattern stop command for special pattern 1 (decoration special pattern 1 stop command) and a pattern stop command for special pattern 2 (decoration special pattern 2 stop command). And MODE
If the part represents a command to stop the symbol (result of B1329 is "Y"), the production control device 3
00 then determines whether the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B13
30).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (result of B1330 is "Y")
, the performance control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special symbol (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols have stopped (B1332), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the gaming status flag is set to the normal status, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the gaming status flag may be set to ``Fluctuating'', ``Making a jackpot'', or ``Making a small hit''. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N
), or the command in the MODE section is not normal (result of B1330 is "N")
, the production control device 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

In addition, although it is not described in FIG.
413) or the decorative special drawing 1 restart command (A7311), the production control device 300
may execute a process of interrupting or resuming the decorative special figure 1 variable display game.

[Ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, details of the prefetch symbol-related command processing (B1214) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 51 shows the production control device 30
It is a flowchart showing the procedure of prefetch symbol type command processing executed by 0.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information on special figure 1 pending (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, if the latest received decoration special figure pending number command is the number of decorative special figure 1 pending. It is determined whether it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 pending (result of B1601 is "Y"), send the pre-read symbol type command (pre-read stop symbol command) to the special figure 1 pre-read symbol command area corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols 1. Save (B1602).

If the latest reservation information is not the information of special figure 1 reservation (result of B1601 is "N"), the production control device 300, in other words, the latest received decoration special figure reservation number command is the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command. In this case, the pre-read symbol command (pre-read stop symbol command) is saved in the special pattern 2 pre-read pattern command area corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings 2 (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the production control device 300 sets a prefetch variable command reception wait flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a prefetch variable command (B160
4). This is because the pre-read symbol type command and the pre-read variable type command are set, so the pre-read variable type command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-read symbol type command. Thereafter, the prefetch symbol-related command processing ends.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, details of the prefetch variable command processing (B1216) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 52 shows the production control device 30
3 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of prefetch variable command processing executed by 0.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetch variable command (B1701). If the above-mentioned read-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the read-ahead variable command processing is ended. When waiting to receive a read-ahead variable command (result of B1701 is "
Y"), and clears the read-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1702).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub board) displays the latest pending information pattern (special figure 1 or special figure 2)
A look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reservations is set (B1703), and a sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE section is obtained corresponding to the MODE section of the look-ahead variation command (B1703).
B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and a look-ahead variation command ACT in the sub that corresponds to the ACTION part (ACT part) of the look-ahead variation command is set.
(B1706).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether both the converted MODE section and ACT section (i.e., the intra-sub look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707).
. Note that if it is a normal (valid) command, it will be converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If both CT parts are other than 0 (result of B1707 is "Y"), MODE part and A after conversion
The converted command configured from the CT section is saved in the look-ahead variable command area (special figure 1 look-ahead change command area or special figure 2 look-ahead change command area) corresponding to the latest pending information and the number of holds (B1708). Then, execute read-ahead command consistency check processing (B170
9), Determine whether the combination of MODE section and ACT section after conversion is normal (B1710
).

Note that the first half fluctuation time corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of suspensions when the suspension variable display game is started. When the pending variable display game starts, if there are no other pending events, the first half of the variation will be longer, and if a new pending event occurs and the number of pending events is large, the first half of the variation will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation command is converted into the sub-prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal commands of the production control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half fluctuation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch fluctuation command ACT part does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are different types of leeches of the same strain,
If the ACT part (the value of the second half variation) of the look-ahead variation command is not converted, the production control device 30
If 0 is used as is, there will be too many numbers and it will be difficult to check. For example, in normal reach,
There are different types, such as normal reach - 1 stop off and normal reach + 1 stop off.
Therefore, by converting the ACT portions indicating reach of the same system into the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portions, the number is reduced and the burden of check processing such as prefetch command consistency check processing is reduced.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the intra-sub intra-prefetch variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or , If the combination of MODE section and ACT section after conversion is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is "N"), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the command after conversion, and the prefetch variable command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal (B
1710 is "Y"), the pending information to be read ahead (information on the latest pending) is loaded from the read ahead variation command area (B1711), and the read ahead lottery process regarding the look ahead performance of the latest pending is executed (B1712). Examples of the look-ahead performance include a continuous preview performance (including a chance look-ahead performance), a look-ahead zone performance, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead effect of the latest suspension (a suspension change notice, etc.) will occur (B1713). When the latest pending look-ahead effect occurs (result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether the prefetched performance (pending change notice, etc.) that occurs is a performance that will start immediately (B1715). If the prefetch effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), a display corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B1716). If the prefetch effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (B1715
(the result is "N"), a display corresponding to the look-ahead effect at the time of hold shift (when the hold display moves, when the hold number decreases) is set and saved (B1717). Then, the prefetch variable command processing ends.

On the other hand, the performance control device 300 determines whether the latest pending look-ahead performance does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N") or when the look-ahead performance that occurs is not a performance that starts immediately (B171
5 result is "N"), leave it as is. Terminates prefetch variable command processing.

[Design-related command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, details of the symbol-related command processing (B1210) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol-related command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 executes the received design-related command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2 command).
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the command) is set (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and ACTION part (ACT
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of parts) and save it in a specified area such as RAM (B180
2). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between special symbols 1 and 2, symbol types are set using a table for each MODE. In this embodiment, the symbol types correspond to the losing symbol, the 10R probability variable jackpot symbol, the 4R probability variable jackpot symbol, and the 10R normal jackpot symbol shown in FIG.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variable command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 determines the special figure type (special figure 1) of the received variable system command (variable command).
Or, it is determined whether the special figure 2) is unconfirmed (B1901). When the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is ended. If the special symbol type is not determined (B1901 result is "N"), check the combination of the received variable type command and symbol type command (B1902), and check whether the variable type command and symbol type are inconsistent. is determined (B1903). Here, inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in performance, such as when a symbol-related command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable-related command of a loss is received. When the variable type command and symbol type are inconsistent (B1903 result is "Y")
, ends variable command processing.

If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the production control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1
904), execute a variable effect setting process to set a variable effect that is a variable effect (B19)
05). Note that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Next, set the special figure changing in the game status flag indicating the game status (P machine status) (B1906), and if the number of look-ahead performances of continuous preview performances (remaining number of continuous preview performances) is 0, it is updated by -1. (B1907
).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variable command process (FIG. 54) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable performance setting process executed by the performance control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the variation pattern type is a non-reach variation (a variation that does not result in a ready-to-reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special figure type, production mode, and setting value (probability setting value) (B2002), and correspond to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type. Obtain the address of the first half notice distribution group table (B200
3). In the case of non-reach fluctuations, the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is obtained.

If the variation pattern type is not a variation without reach (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if it is a variation with reach, the production control device 300 controls the number of production points, model code, special symbol type, production mode, Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting value (probability setting value) (B2004), and set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the MODE part of the fluctuation command (variation command) and the fluctuation pattern type. (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the production control device 300 performs a lottery for previews that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Note that the preview lottery probability depends on the set value. Next, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special symbol type, production mode, symbol type, and setting value (probability setting value) (B2007), and set the variable type command. The address of the second-half preview distribution group table corresponding to the ACT section is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for previews appearing during the second-half fluctuation (reach) is performed (B2009). Note that the preview lottery probability depends on the set value. Thereafter, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010). In addition, you can see the fluctuation time and main reach contents from the fluctuation command.

Next, the performance control device 300 determines the content of the performance (preview performance) corresponding to the lottery result of the preview (B2011). Then, the content of a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a setting value (probability setting value, setting) is determined (B2012). Thereafter, a stop symbol setting process is executed to determine the stop symbols of the decorative special symbol variable display game according to the content of the variable performance such as the ready-to-win performance or the preview performance (B2013). Here, the decorative stop symbols are specifically determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of a missed symbol.

Next, the production control device 300 performs display settings for the setting suggestion production (B2014). Perform display settings for variable effects such as reach effects (B2015), and perform display settings for preview effects (B20)
16). Next, display settings are made to display a reduction in hold (hold shift) that corresponds to the special figure type. For example, in addition to setting the display to decrease the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that will change this time, it is also possible to set the display to decrease the hold display corresponding to the special figure that will change this time. Corresponding display information (B1717) and the like are read out (B2017). Subsequently, an audio number that determines the presentation mode (sound output mode) by the speaker's voice and a decoration number that determines the presentation mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2018). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting parts (decoration LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number. .

Note that it is possible to set the voice number and decoration number not only based on the performance content, but also by drawing a lottery with a lottery probability according to a setting value (probability setting value). In this way, the player can check the light emission mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emission mode of the decorative light emitting section (LED),
You can enjoy guessing the setting value (probability setting value).

Next, the production control device 300 performs display settings for decorative special figure fluctuations corresponding to the special figure type (B
2019), the display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) in addition to the first to third special symbols is performed (B2020). In addition, the fourth symbol fluctuation is caused by the display device 41.
The lamp display parts 1 and 2 (LED) of the above-mentioned lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the above, and/or
It is displayed on the display device 41.

[Hit command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, details of the hit command processing (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the MODE part of the received winning command represents a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE part of the winning command represents a fanfare (result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is a jackpot fanfare command or a small win fanfare command, a fanfare effect setting process is performed to set the fanfare effect. (B2102). The fanfare command includes information about the upper limit of the number of rounds for this jackpot. Next, the game status flag indicating the current gaming status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 is set to fanfare in progress (
B2103), the hit-related command processing ends. In addition, the round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol-related command (decoration special command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received winning command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the winning command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, when the winning command is a round command or a small winning opening command, the production control device 300 executes the round production setting process, and the current The game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "Round in progress" (B2105, B21
06), the hit-related command processing ends.

If the MODE part of the received winning command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the winning command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B2107
(the result is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an interval command, the production control device 300 executes the interval production setting process, and sets the game that indicates the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P machine state). The status flag is set to "interval" (B2108, B2109), and the hit command processing is ended. In addition, when the big prize opening is opened only once due to a small win, that is, when the small win is one round, there is no interval command.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent an interval (B2107
The result is "N"), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the winning command represents an ending (B2110). When the MODE part represents the ending (B21
10 result is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an ending command or a small winning end screen command, the production control device 300 executes the ending production setting process for setting the ending production, and changes the current The game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "ending" (B2111, B2112), and the winning command processing is ended.

In addition, if the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent the ending (B2
110 is "N"), the production control device 300 ends the winning command processing without executing any processing.

The setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 66.

[Time chart of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 57 is a time chart of setting suggestion performance performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which a setting suggestion performance is executed multiple times in a predetermined period in connection with a special figure fluctuation display game. As a specific example, the starting prize opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 3
When the game ball wins on 7, the special figure fluctuation display game starts, and before the normal reach (first reach) occurs, the first setting suggestion performance (setting notification performance) is performed, and after the normal reach,
A case will be described in which the second setting suggestion performance is executed after the SP reach occurs (or does not need to occur) and before the end of the special symbol variation display game. Note that the plurality of times is not limited to two times, but may be three or more times.

The setting suggestion effect is, for example, when displaying a variable display game on the display device 41 (FIG. 4), for example, character A, character B, character C (characters having mutually distinguishable shapes, colors, and patterns). This is an effect that can indicate the currently set probability setting value based on the number of displayed items, and occurs with a predetermined probability (about 1/100 in this embodiment). Further, the setting suggestion effect may also occur at other timings than the variable display game (for example, when a ball out error is canceled).

For example, character A suggests a so-called odd number setting, and the currently set probability setting value is
This is to suggest (notify) that the probability setting value is one of the odd probability setting values (1, 3, 5) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). Note that the internal probability setting value 1 stored in the probability setting value area
to 6 correspond to settings 1 to 6, respectively.

For example, character B suggests a so-called even number setting, and the currently set probability setting value is
This is to suggest (notify) that the probability setting value is one of the even probability setting values (2, 4, 6) among the probability setting values (1 to 6).

For example, character C suggests (notification) that the currently set probability setting value is one of the high settings (probability setting value (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It is something to do.

In the first setting suggestion performance, one to three characters each of Character A, Character B, and Character C are displayed. In the second setting suggestion presentation, 1 to 10 characters each of Character A, Character B, and Character C are displayed, but 4 to 10 characters are more likely to be selected. For example, by making the difference in the number of characters displayed between Character A, Character B, and Character C more noticeable than the first time, it is possible to determine which character is being used to suggest settings intended by the production control device 300 (gaming control device 100). It is good to be able to judge.

[Reliability of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 58 is a table showing an example of the reliability of the setting suggestion performance performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 58 is just an example and can be modified as appropriate.

In the setting suggestion performance, for example, the reliability of the setting suggestion performance by the characters can be set based on the number of characters A, B, and C. By randomly selecting the number of characters with a probability of winning according to the settings, it is possible to set the reliability according to the number of characters. When a lottery is performed by allocating each number of items, the probability of winning is the allocation rate (selection rate). If each number is drawn independently rather than sorted, there may be duplicate wins (for example, 4 and 7), in which case one of the winners is selected.

Note that the setting suggestion effect may be performed only by the character with the largest number of characters among Character A, Character B, and Character C. do).

As described above, in the first setting suggestion performance, one to three characters each of Character A, Character B, and Character C are displayed. Therefore, if the number of each of characters A to C is 1, 2, or 3, a lottery is drawn at a winning probability according to the setting.

As mentioned above, in the second setting suggestion performance, 1 to 10 characters each of Character A, Character B, and Character C are displayed, so the number of characters A to C is 1, 2, 3, etc. 4 pieces,
In the case of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 items, a lottery is drawn with a winning probability according to the settings. In addition, since 4 to 10 items are more likely to be selected, the probability of winning 4 to 10 items is reduced to 1.
～Make the winning probability significantly higher than the winning probability of 3 (in extreme cases, reduce the winning probability of 1 to 3 to zero)
.

As shown in Figure 58, the reliability is set so that each time the number of characters A, B, and C displayed increases by one, the reliability increases by 10%, and when 10 characters are displayed, the reliability is set to 100%. can do. For example, 1, 2, and 3 characters C appear evenly in all settings, and the reliability of setting suggestions for high settings is low.

Furthermore, the reliability shown in FIG. 58 can be obtained by multiplying the ratio of the total number of displayed characters to the number of displayed characters with the largest number of displayed characters.

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed multiple times during the variable display game. In suggestion production, the amount of increase for a specific character (not the number of characters)
The reliability of the setting suggestion may be notified. For example, the setting suggestion by the character with the largest amount of increase may be used as the setting suggestion performance intended by the production control device 300 (gaming control device 100), and the reliability of the setting suggestion may be notified based on the magnitude of the increase. It is possible.

Note that setting of the setting suggestion effect is performed in step B2012 and step B2014 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 55), as described above.

[Expectation level of jackpot]
FIG. 59 is an example of a table showing the relationship between the setting suggestion performance performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment and the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 59(A), in this embodiment, the expectation level of a "jackpot" is set high when a setting suggestion effect occurs, and is set low when it does not occur. FIG. 59 is just an example and can be modified as appropriate.

When a "jackpot" occurs, the percentage of a "jackpot" occurring after a setting suggestion presentation is set at 80%, and the percentage of a "jackpot" occurring without a setting suggestion presentation is set at 20%.

On the other hand, when a "miss" occurs, the percentage of "miss" occurring after a setting suggestion performance is 1%, and the percentage of "miss" occurring without a setting suggestion performance is 99%.

As a result, if there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a ``jackpot'' will occur afterwards, and even if there is no setting suggestion effect, a ``jackpot'' will occur, which will give the player a sense of expectation. can give you a surprise.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), setting suggestions are made by changing the first aspect (e.g., number, color) of the characters that appear in the setting suggestion effect, and the second aspect (e.g., size) of the characters is used to determine the jackpot. It is also possible to notify the level of expectation. As mentioned above, the effect control device 300 (gaming control device 100
) is possible to perform the setting suggestion effect intended by the user. In addition, if any character among Character A, Character B, and Character C has a different color from the other characters, the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) will suggest settings intended by the character having the different color. It is also possible to perform a performance.

When a "jackpot" occurs, the percentage of "jackpot" occurring after a setting suggestion effect displayed by a large character is 50%, and a "jackpot" occurs after a setting suggestion effect displayed by a character smaller than the large character. ” occurs at 30%, and the rate at which a “jackpot” occurs without any setting suggestion effect is set at 20%.

Conversely, when a "miss" occurs, the percentage of "miss" occurring after a setting suggestion effect displayed by a large character is 1%, and after a setting suggestion effect displayed by a character smaller than the large character. The rate at which "misses" occur is 1%, and the rate at which "misses" occur without any setting suggestion effect is 98%.

As a result, when there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a "jackpot" will occur afterwards, and by performing the setting suggestion effect with a particularly large character, that feeling of expectation can be raised. It is possible to further increase the level of interest in the game.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 60 is a screen transition diagram of setting suggestion performance performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. Here, a case will be described in which a setting suggestion effect is executed when executing a decorative special figure variable display game in which the variable display progresses from normal reach to SP reach. The setting suggestion effect is executed before normal reach (first time) and when SP reach (SP3 reach) occurs (second time).

(A1) in FIG. 60 is a display screen when starting the decorative special figure variation display game. A variable display area 610 (left area 610A, middle area 610C, right area 610
B) is arranged, and a decorative stop pattern “6, 1, 2” is displayed in the variable display area 610. Further, a variable display area 615 is arranged at the lower right corner of the display device 41.
15, the stop symbols "6, 1, 2" are displayed. In addition, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the number "3" indicating the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number "3" indicating the number of reserved special drawings 2 and the number "3" indicating the number of reserved special drawings 2 are displayed in the number display section 650 of the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number display section 660 of the number of reserved special drawings 2 reserved, respectively. The number "0" indicating the number is displayed.

In the first hold display section 630a that displays the first starting memory as the first hold display, the hold display 633 (first hold display) moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold is displayed in the hold extinguishing area 640 of the rectangular frame. The hold display 633 at the right end of the display section 630a moves. At this moment, the second suspension display section 630b that displays the second starting memory as a second suspension display (second starting memory display) does not display the pending display 633.

After that, in (A2), the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610 as the identification information, and the variation (↓↓) of the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) is being executed as the identification information.
↓) is being executed in the variable display area 615. In the left area 610A, right area 610B, and middle area 610C of the variable display area 610, the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol are fluctuating, respectively. Further, a pending display 633a during fluctuation indicating a hold related to the special figure variable display game being executed (the starting memory that was the right to execute this special figure variable display game) is displayed in the hold extinguishment area 640. In addition, the number “2” indicating the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number “0” indicating the number of reserved drawings 2 are displayed in the number displaying section 650 of the number of special drawings 1 reserved and the number displaying section 660 of the number of reserved special drawings 2, respectively. ing.

Also, at this time, as the first setting suggestion effect, the character A (bear) is displayed on the display device 41.
, character B (frog), and character C (tiger) are displayed in plural numbers. In (A2), 2 characters A, 2 characters B, and 1 character C are displayed, but at the moment character A
The reliability of the setting suggestion of character B is 20%, the reliability of the setting suggestion of character C is 10%, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of character C is 10%.
It is not very clear whether 00) is making the intended setting suggestion.

However, for players who know that the setting suggestion performance will be performed multiple times, they can foresee that a highly reliable setting suggestion will be made in the next setting suggestion performance, so the setting suggestion is not clear in this way. Even if it is a setting suggestion performance, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance and concentrate on the game.

Note that the display position of each character is arbitrary, and may be displayed as a still image or as a moving image in which the expression and display position of each character moves.

Next, in (A3), the state becomes a ready-to-reach state (normal reach), the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the first setting suggestion performance ends. Note that in (A3), the display of each character is erased, but they may continue to be displayed. Also, at this time, the character display 755
a “Reach” is displayed below the variable display area 610.

After that, in (A4), the reach develops from the normal reach state to the SP3 reach, a movie effect (video effect) is executed in the center of the display screen, and the left and right symbols are moved to the upper corner of the screen. Moving. At this time, the character display 755a "Reach" may disappear.

Further, along with the transition to SP3 reach, a second setting suggestion performance is executed. Here, for example, character A, character B, and character C are displayed around the movie presentation (video presentation), and more characters are displayed than in the first setting suggestion presentation. In (A4), three characters A, four characters B, and five characters C are displayed. Here, we will show an example in which setting suggestions are made based on the number of character C that is displayed the most (5), and the reliability of setting suggestions for character C (probability setting value is either 5 or 6) is set to 50%. It can be displayed (set) as

Also, the number of character C that is displayed the most (5) and the total number of characters displayed (3+4+
5=12), the reliability of character C's setting suggestion is (5/12) x 50% = 20
．． It can also be displayed (set) as 8%. At this time, in order to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion by character C is even higher, in the second setting suggestion performance, a lottery may be performed so that the number of characters A or B displayed is reduced compared to the first time. .

Furthermore, one character C is displayed the first time, and five characters are displayed the second time, increasing the number of characters displayed by four. Therefore, for example, assuming that the increase in reliability per item is 10%, the reliability of the second setting suggestion for character C can be set to 4×10% of the increase (regardless of the number).

After that, in (A5), the special symbol fluctuation display game ends and the setting suggestion performance also ends, and the jackpot decorative stop symbol "3, 3, 3" is displayed in the fluctuation display area 610, and the jackpot stop symbol "3" is displayed in the variable display area 610. , 3, 3'' is displayed in the variable display area 615. In addition, a character display 755b "Jackpot!!" is displayed below the decorative stop symbol. Further, at this time, the changing pending display 633a that had been displayed in the pending expiry area 640 disappears, thereby making it possible to confirm that one pending request has been completely exhausted.

Next, in (A6), a jackpot round game starts, and a jackpot state (special game state)
At the same time, the performance of the jackpot round begins. In addition, in the setting suggestion effect (first and/or second time), character A, character B, and character C are displayed larger than in the case shown in FIG. 60, thereby indicating that the expectation level of the jackpot is even higher. It is also possible to notify (set) the information.

[Time chart of setting suggestion production (first variation)]
FIG. 61 is a time chart of a first modification of the setting suggestion performance performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the first modified example, a pseudo continuous effect consisting of a predetermined number of pseudo fluctuations (3 times) is executed before the normal reach occurs, the first setting suggestion effect occurs during the second pseudo fluctuation, and the second A setting suggestion effect occurs during the third pseudo change. The predetermined number of pseudo continuous effects and pseudo fluctuations may be determined, for example, in step B2010 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 55). The pseudo-continuous performance is a performance in which a pseudo-variation in which the decorative special symbols (identification information) are varied and temporarily stopped is performed a predetermined number of times (predetermined steps) from the start to the end of one variable display game.

Character A (red) (Fig. 62A) suggests a so-called odd number setting, for example, the currently set probability setting value is the odd probability setting value (1, 3) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 5).

Character B (blue) (Fig. 62A) suggests a so-called even number setting. For example, the currently set probability setting value is an even number probability setting value (2, 4) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 6).

For example, for character C (yellow) (Fig. 62A), the currently set probability setting value is a high setting (either probability setting value (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). This suggests something.

In the first modification, a group effect is performed in which a character group is formed and displayed using a plurality of characters. In the character group, the total number of character A (red) and character B (blue) is constant (or
(approximately constant), and the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is an even number or an odd number is reported based on the ratio. In the character group, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is the high setting "5, 6" is notified based on the number of characters C (yellow). Note that character A and character B may have the same shape only by changing the color.

Character A (red) and character B (blue) suggest odd and even settings, which are exclusive events, so the total number is kept constant and the ratio of character A (red) and character B (blue) is The reliability of setting suggestions can be reported.

In the first setting suggestion performance, for example, the ratio of the number of character A (red): character B (blue) is set to 7.
:3, and in the second setting suggestion performance, the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) is set to 9:1, thereby increasing the reliability of setting suggestions for odd settings where the probability setting value is an odd number. You can increase the degree. For example, with a ratio of 7:3, the confidence level for odd settings is 70% (the confidence level for even settings is 3%).
0%), and with a ratio of 9:1, the reliability for odd settings is 90% (the reliability for even settings is 10%).
).

Conversely, in the first setting suggestion performance, for example, the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) is set to 3:7, and in the second setting suggestion performance, character A (red): character B By setting the ratio of the numbers (blue) to 1:9, it is also possible to increase the reliability of setting suggestions for even settings where the probability setting value is an even number. For example, with a ratio of 3:7, the confidence in the even setting is 70% (the confidence in the odd setting is 30%), and in the ratio 1:9, the confidence in the even setting is 90% (the confidence in the odd setting is 10%).

Furthermore, in the first setting suggestion performance, for example, the number of character C (yellow) displayed is set to 5, and in the second setting suggestion performance, the number of character C (yellow) displayed is increased to 7, thereby increasing the probability. It is also possible to increase the reliability of the setting suggestion that the setting value is a high setting.

In the first modification, if, for example, character C (or character A or character B) is not displayed in the first setting suggestion presentation, or if none of character A, character B, or character C is displayed, the jackpot will be announced. It is possible to set the expectation level to be low. Further, if character A, character B, and character C are all displayed, it is possible to set the expectation level of a jackpot as being high.

Furthermore, it is also possible to set the expectation level of a jackpot to change based on changes in the displayed sizes and colors of characters A, B, and C. When the character performing the setting suggestion performance indicates that the expectation level of the jackpot is high, it may be performed together with a change in the display mode indicating that the expectation level of the jackpot is high in the changing pending display 633a of the pending consumption area 640. , the change in the display mode may be prohibited so that the player can pay attention to the setting suggestion effect.

[Screen transition diagram (first modification)]
FIG. 62A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a first modification of the setting suggestion performance performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 62B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the first modification of the setting suggestion performance performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

(B1) in FIG. 62A is similar to (A1) in FIG. 60. (B2) of FIG. 62A is
Although it is the same as (A2) of 0, the fluctuation display displayed in the fluctuation display area 610 is the first pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo continuous performance.

Then, in (B3), the first pseudo variation (single performance) of the pseudo continuous performance is finished, and the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle area 610C, a pseudo continuous pattern that suggests a pseudo continuous performance is displayed. is stopped and displayed. Also, the number of executions of the pseudo fluctuation that will start from now on (the number of pseudo consecutive runs)
A character display 752 "pseudo twice" is displayed.

After that, in (B4), the second pseudo fluctuation starts and the first setting suggestion effect (
A group performance) will be performed. For example, as shown in (B4), character A (star-shaped ★), character B (
A video of a meteor shower created by the star-shaped ☆) and character C (triangle △) flowing from the right to the left of the screen is played for a predetermined period of time. Then, by playing the video, it is possible to notify that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

At this time, for example, the ratio between the number of characters displayed for character A (red) and the number of characters displayed for character B (blue) is
7:3, which indicates that the reliability of the odd number setting suggestion is somewhat high.
Furthermore, since character C (yellow) is also displayed, it is possible to suggest a high setting by displaying character C (yellow) with a predetermined reliability (FIG. 58 may be sufficient). Note that while the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) is being performed, the character display 752 "Pseudo 2 times" may remain displayed or may be deleted.

Next, in (B5), the first setting suggestion presentation (group presentation) ends. Further, in (B5) as well, the character display 752 "pseudo twice" may remain displayed or may be deleted.
Note that the second pseudo fluctuation continues in the fluctuation display area 610.

Then, in (B6), the second pseudo variation is completed and the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle area 610C, a pseudo continuous pattern that suggests a pseudo continuous performance is stopped and displayed. At the same time, a character display 7 indicating the number of executions (pseudo continuous number) of pseudo fluctuations to be started from now on.
52 "Pseudo 3 times" is displayed.

After that, in (B7) of FIG. 62B, the pseudo variation (
↓↓↓) is executed in the variable display area 610 for a predetermined period of time.

After that, in (B8), a second setting suggestion performance (group performance) is performed. At this time, (B
Similarly to 4), an image of a meteor shower of characters A, B, and C flowing from right to left on the screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time. However, this time, the ratio of the number of displayed characters A (red) to the number displayed of character B (blue) is 9:1, and the reliability of the setting suggesting an odd number setting is even higher.

Furthermore, since the number of displayed characters C (yellow) has also increased from 5 to 7, it is possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion has increased by the increase (see FIG. 58). On the contrary, 2
If the number of character C (yellow) displayed has not increased or decreased in the setting suggestion presentation for the second time, it may be reported that the reliability of the setting suggestion by character C (yellow) is not very high. can.

Next, at (B9), the player enters a ready-to-win state, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the setting suggestion performance (group performance) ends. In this case, since the pseudo continuous effect has ended, the middle area 61
No pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed on 0C. In addition, the character display 755 “Reach” is displayed in the variable display area 6
Displayed below 10.

After that, in (B10), the special symbol variation display game ends, and the "miss" stop symbol "3, 1, 3" is displayed in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615. Also, at this time,
The changing pending display 633a that had been displayed in the pending expiry area 640 disappears, and it can therefore be confirmed that one pending item has been completely consumed.

[Time chart of setting suggestion production (second variation)]
FIG. 63 is a time chart of a second modification of the setting suggestion performance performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the gaming machine 10, a character zone effect (for example, a preview effect using the entire display screen) may be performed with a predetermined probability based on a pending prize that has a high expectation of a jackpot. It is possible to notify that expectations are high.

Therefore, in the second modification, a setting suggestion performance is performed with a predetermined probability when entering the character zone, and it is reported that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the setting suggestion performance appears than when only the character zone occurs.

Further, the character zone continues until the suspension that triggered entry into the character zone is exhausted, and during that time, a plurality of variable display games are played while the suspension is exhausted. At this time, a setting suggestion effect is performed each time the variable display game is started, and the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased each time the variable display game is started.

In this way, in the second modification, the character zone effect is executed over multiple special figure variation display games as a prefetch effect based on suspension (prefetch zone effect), and the prefetch variation command processing (see figure 52). In addition, the character zone production is not limited to this,
A predetermined opportunity (timing) such as when there is a high expectation of a jackpot in the special figure fluctuation display game being executed.
It may be something that occurs in the game and is executed over multiple fluctuating display games, and the fluctuating effect setting process (
It may be set as shown in FIG. 55).

In the second modification, there are already three holds (hold 3, hold 3,
Let us consider a case where a hold with a high expectation of winning a jackpot (hold 0) wins a prize, and the holds are used up in the order of hold 3, hold 2, hold 1, and hold 0.

Then, the first setting suggestion performance is performed when the hold 3 is finished, the second setting suggestion performance is performed when the hold 2 is finished, the third setting suggestion performance is performed when the hold 1 is finished, The fourth setting suggestion performance is performed when the pending 0 is exhausted.

In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A are displayed that suggest an odd probability setting, two characters B are displayed that suggest an even probability setting, and a high probability setting is displayed. Character C that suggests this is not displayed (0 characters are displayed).

In the second setting suggestion performance, for example, three characters A are displayed that suggest setting an odd probability setting value, three characters B are displayed suggesting an even probability setting value, and a high probability setting value is displayed. One character C that suggests this is displayed.

In the third setting suggestion performance, for example, three characters A are displayed that suggest an odd probability setting value, five character Bs are displayed that suggest an even probability setting value, and a high probability setting value is displayed. Four characters C are displayed that suggest this.

In the fourth setting suggestion performance, for example, three characters A are displayed that suggest an odd probability setting value, five character Bs are displayed that suggest an even probability setting value, and a high probability setting value is displayed. Seven characters C that suggest this are displayed.

In this way, the number of characters displayed that makes the setting suggestion intended by the production control device 300 (game control device 100) is increased each time the special figure variable display game is played. Figure 63
Now, since the number of characters displayed for character B has increased and is now more than character A, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is an even number is higher than the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is an odd number. I can judge.

Also, since the number of characters C displayed increases from 0, 1, 4, and 7 each time you play the special figure variation display game, the setting is set higher depending on the display mode (increase amount) of character C. It is also possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion is high.

On the other hand, if the number of characters C displayed does not increase or decreases no matter how many times the special figure fluctuation display game is played, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the setting is high depends on the display mode (amount of decrease) of character C. It is also possible to notify that the temperature is low.

[Screen transition diagram (second modification)]
FIG. 64A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion performance performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 64B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion performance performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

(C1) of FIG. 64A is a display screen when starting the decorative special figure variation display game, and FIG.
Similar to 0 (A1), a stop symbol is displayed. The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 display the number "4" indicating the number of special plots 1 reserved and the number "0" indicating the number of special plots 2 reserved, respectively. .

In (C1), a first hold display section 630 displays the first start memory as a first hold display.
In a, the hold display 633 (hold 3) moves to the right (hold shift), and the right end hold display 633 of the first hold display section 630a moves to the hold extinguishing area 640 in the rectangular frame.

Here, the pending display 633 (pending 0) displayed on the first pending display section 630a is determined in advance as a setting suggestion performance with a high expectation of a jackpot when winning a prize. As a result, the hold display 633 (hold 0) changes the hold to a display mode that is different from other holds, such as in color, to notify that the expectation level is high, but this display mode may be omitted.

Thereafter, in (C2), a variable display similar to that in (A3) of FIG. 60 is performed, and at the same time, expiration of pending 3 is started. At this time, a pending change display 633a indicating a hold (pending 3) related to the special figure variable display game being executed is displayed in the hold extinguishing area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 reserve number displayed by the special figure 1 reserve number display section 650 is "3".

Furthermore, when starting to finish the reservation 3, the first setting suggestion effect is performed, the character zone is entered, and the background (color, pattern, etc.) displayed on the display device 41 changes.

In (C2), three characters A (bear) are displayed, two characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is not displayed.

By the way, as described above, the pending display 633 (pending 0) is determined in advance as a setting suggestion presentation with a high expectation of a jackpot when winning a prize. Therefore, it is also possible to enter the character zone at the stage where the reservation 0 is won (the stage before (C1)). However, by causing the character to enter the character zone when the pending 3 is completed, attention to the pending 3 can be increased.

After that (C3), the first variable display game ends, and the stop symbols "3, 2, 9" of "miss" are displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the floating pending display is displayed. When 633a also disappears, pending 3 becomes completed. At this time, character A, character B
is moved to a position that does not overlap with the stop symbols "3, 2, 9" or is erased, thereby ending the first setting suggestion performance.

Next, in (C4), a variable display similar to that in (C2) is performed, and at the same time, expiration of pending 2 is started. At this time, a pending change display 633a indicating a hold (pending 2) related to the special figure variable display game being executed is displayed in the hold extinguishing area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 reserve number displayed by the special figure 1 reserve number display section 650 is "2".

Also, when starting to finish Pending 2, a second setting suggestion effect is performed, with 3 characters A (bear) displayed, 3 characters B (frog) displayed, and 3 characters C (tiger) displayed. One item is displayed.

After that (C5), the second variable display game ends, and the stop symbols "5, 7, 8" of "miss" are displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the floating pending display is displayed. 633a also disappears, so that the pending 2 is completed. At this time, character A, character B
, character C moves to a position where it does not overlap with the stop symbols "5, 7, 8" or is erased, thereby ending the second setting suggestion performance.

Next, in (C6), the same variable display as in (C2) and (C4) is performed, and the expiry of the hold 1 is started. At this time, the suspension related to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed (Suspension 1)
A pending pending display 633a indicating the following is displayed in the pending expiration area 640. Also, special map 1
The special figure 1 pending number displayed by the pending number display section 650 is "1".

Also, when starting to finish Pending 1, a third setting suggestion effect is performed, with 3 character A (bear) displayed, 5 character B (frog), and character C (tiger) displayed. 4 items are displayed.

After that (C7), the third variable display game ends, and the stop symbols "4, 2, 1" of "miss" are displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the floating pending display is displayed. When 633a also disappears, the pending 1 becomes completed. At this time, character A, character B
, character C moves to a position where it does not overlap with the stop symbols "4, 2, 1", or is erased, thereby ending the third setting suggestion performance.

Next, at (C8), the same variable display as in (C2), (C4), and (C6) is performed, and the use of pending 0 is started. At this time, a pending change display 633a indicating a hold (pending 0) related to the special figure variable display game being executed is displayed in the hold extinguishing area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 reserve number displayed by the special figure 1 reserve number display section 650 is "0".

Also, when starting to finish the pending 0, a setting suggestion effect is performed for the fourth time, 3 characters of character A (bear) are displayed, 5 characters of character B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. Seven items are displayed.

After that (C9), the fourth variable display game ends, and the "miss" stop symbols "2, 6, 9" are displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the floating pending display is displayed. When 633a also disappears, Pending 1 becomes completed, and the character zone ends. At this time, character A, character B, and character C are deleted, thereby ending the fourth setting suggestion performance.

[Other setting suggestions]
FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of another setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 65, instead of using the character, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 using a right-handed hitting instruction display 620 of the hitting instruction displays. In this case, the reliability of the high setting may be increased as the number of right-hand hitting instruction displays 620 increases.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed even when the special figure variation display game is not in progress, if the timing is such that the player can easily pay attention to the display device 41. In the example of FIG. 65, when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the special game state, such as during a jackpot fanfare, a setting suggestion effect is executed by the right hit instruction display 620. In this way, by executing the setting suggestion performance at a timing that is likely to attract the player's attention, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion performance from being overlooked. Furthermore, during the jackpot fanfare, a display 621 ``Aim for the gate!!'' is also displayed, which suggests that the player should hit the game ball to the normal pattern starting gate 34 by hitting right.

When a sorting gate for selecting the upper limit of the number of rounds for a jackpot is provided in the right game area 32, a display 621 may be used to indicate that the player should aim at this sorting gate instead of the regular pattern starting gate 34. Furthermore, since the jackpot round does not start until the game ball passes through the distribution gate, it is possible to further prevent the setting suggestion performance from being overlooked.

FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating another example of another setting suggestion effect. In the example of FIG. 66, an error that the player cannot intentionally cause and has to interrupt the game (here, a ball out error)
When this occurs, a setting suggestion effect is executed. Even in this case, since the setting suggestion performance is executed at a timing when the player tends to pay attention to the setting suggestion performance, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion performance from being overlooked.

During the decorative special figure fluctuation display game that started at (D1) in Figure 66, a ball out error occurs due to the detection of the shot ball out switch signal as shown in (D2), and error display 623 "Ball out error" is displayed. be done. A character 625 is displayed together with an error display 623, and the display mode (expression) of the character 625 notifies the reliability of the high setting. After that, (D3
), the character 625 is displayed along with the error release display 627 "Error has been cleared" indicating that the error has been cleared, and the display mode (facial expression) of the character 625 is displayed.
Similarly, the high setting reliability is notified.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
According to the above, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a performance control means (performance control device 300) capable of executing a performance related to a variable display game in which identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and a stop result of the variable display game. In the gaming machine 10 that can generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, a setting changing means (setting key switch 93 , RAM initialization switch 112), and the production control means (production control device 300) can execute a setting suggestion production that suggests information (probability setting value) regarding the setting value a plurality of times in a predetermined period.

With the above configuration, by performing setting suggestion effects multiple times in a predetermined period (for example, during a period of one variable display game or a period spanning multiple variable display games) in connection with a variable display game, etc. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the game and concentrate on the game, and to increase the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion performance multiple times in one variable display game.

With the above configuration, by increasing the degree of attention to one variable display game in which a setting suggestion performance is performed a plurality of times, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the performance, and it is also possible to make the player concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the production control means (production control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion production multiple times over a plurality of variable display games.

With the above configuration, by performing the setting suggestion performance in accordance with the timing of the performance such as the zone performance that is performed over a plurality of variable display games, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance and to concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the production control means (production control device 300) sets the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion production to be executed later to be higher than the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion production to be executed first. , Set multiple setting suggestion effects.

With the above configuration, by making a difference in the reliability of setting suggestions depending on the timing,
The player enjoys watching the effects and waiting to see if a setting suggestion effect will appear at a specific timing. Therefore, by increasing expectations for the setting suggestion performance that will appear next, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance and to concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the production control means (production control device 300) can notify the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game will be a special result by making the setting suggestion production appear, and the mode of the setting suggestion production. The reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion performance changes depending on the change (increase in the number of characters, etc.).

With the above configuration, by associating the setting suggestion performance with the expectation level of a special result (jackpot), even players who are playing the game without worrying about the probability setting value can draw attention to the performance, and the mode of the setting suggestion performance can be changed. By associating the change in the reliability of the setting suggestion, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance and to concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the production control means (production control device 300) displays the same type of images (Character A, Character B, Character C) on the display device 41 in multiple setting suggestion productions. The production modes of the setting suggestion production of the times are associated with each other.

With the above configuration, by displaying the same type of character multiple times in the setting suggestion performance, the setting suggestion performances that are performed multiple times are related to each other, and by paying attention to this, the setting suggestion can be grasped. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance and to concentrate on the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a performance control means (performance control device 300) capable of executing a performance related to a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner, and the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. In this case, in the gaming machine 10 that can generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, a setting changing means (setting key switch 93, RAM initialization The production control means (production control device 300) can execute a setting suggestion production that suggests information (probability setting value) regarding the setting value, and by making the setting suggestion production appear, the production control means (production control device 300) can change the variable display by making the setting suggestion production appear. It is characterized by being able to notify the degree of expectation that the game stop result will be a special result.

With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion performance from being overlooked by performing the setting suggestion performance associated with the degree of expectation of a special result (jackpot).

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect by displaying the characters (Character A, Character B, Character C) on the display device 41.

With the above configuration, setting suggestion performance can be performed in a simple and easily identifiable manner.

[Second embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. Note that the configuration other than those described below may be the same as in the first embodiment. Furthermore, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. Second
The embodiment relates to display probability setting values and how to display them in a setting variable state (setting change mode).

[Work settings, display probability settings, production control information]
FIG. 67 shows working setting values and display probability setting values (setting example 1,
2, 3, 4) and production control information (production setting values, production setting values). Normally, the gaming control device 100 holds six working setting values "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" (setting values), and correspondingly holds probability setting values (information regarding the setting values). Yes, the probability of hitting the jackpot (
and information corresponding to the small winning probability) "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6". However, depending on the gaming machine 10, the jackpot probability (and small win probability) corresponding to different probability setting values
are the same, and the number of display probability settings may be less than six.
That is, in order to prevent confusion among hall personnel, etc., even if the probability setting values used or stored inside the gaming machine 10 are different, if the jackpot probability (and small winning probability) is the same, the jackpot probability (and small winning probability) will be the same. The display probability setting values associated with the winning probability) are set to the same value. The same display probability setting value means the same jackpot probability (and small win probability).

In setting example 1 in FIG. 67, display probability setting values 1-6 are set for work setting values 0-5, respectively, and the display probability setting values are set to different values. Setting example 2 represents a case where all display probability setting values corresponding to six work setting values are set to "1". In setting example 3, the display probability setting values corresponding to the work setting values "0", "1", and "2" are each set to "1", and the work setting values "3", "4", " This shows a case where the display probability setting value corresponding to "5" is set to "2". In setting example 4, the working setting values are “0” and “1.”
”, set the display probability settings to “1”, and set the work settings to “2” and “3”.
This shows a case where the display probability setting values corresponding to the work setting values "4" and "5" are respectively set to "2", and the display probability setting values corresponding to the work setting values "4" and "5" are respectively set to "3".

In setting example 1, the display probability setting value changes every time the RAM initialization switch 112, which is a setting value change switch, is pressed. can be identified as reacting.

On the other hand, in setting example 2, regardless of the value of the work setting, all display probability settings are "1".
”, the display probability setting value will change to “1” before and after pressing the RAM initialization switch 112.
'' remains unchanged, and it is not possible to determine whether or not the display on the performance display device 152 (display section) is responding to the operator's operation of the RAM initialization switch 112. Also, in setting example 3, the work setting values are changed from "0" to "1", "1" to "2", "3" to "4", and "4".
It is not possible to identify whether or not the gaming machine 10 (gaming control device 100) is responding to the operation when changing from "5" to "5". Furthermore, in setting example 4, the work setting value is changed from "0" to "1".
”, “2” to “3”, and “4” to “5”, respectively.

Therefore, in this embodiment, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, that is, each time the work setting value is changed, the display probability setting value is temporarily changed to the RAM initialization switch 11.
By displaying a different display before and after pressing 2, it is possible to identify whether or not the gaming machine 10 (gaming control device 100) is responding to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The procedure for probability setting change/confirmation processing in this embodiment is similar to that in the first embodiment, but intermediate data (intermediate It is characterized by transmitting (displaying) information) to the performance display device 152.

As shown in FIG. 68, the working setting value in the working setting value area (in the RAM 111c or register) is updated by +1 in the range of "0" to "5", and the probability setting value corresponds to the working setting value. After updating probability setting values 1 to 6 of the area by +1 (A2410), intermediate data is set as probability setting value display data in the probability setting value display data area (A2411), and the set probability setting value display data (intermediate data ) is output (A2412). In this case, the performance display device 152 maintains a display mode based on the intermediate data until the next probability setting value display data is output (A2404). Note that if the time for displaying the intermediate data is too short to be recognized by the operator, a timer may be activated to delay the display for a predetermined period of time after outputting the probability setting value display data (intermediate data).

The intermediate data is displayed using LEDs (light-emitting members: 8 segments a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp) for displaying each digit of the 4-digit performance display device 152. ) are all turned off (Figures 69 and 70), and all LEDs are turned on (Figure 71).
), there is a display mode (FIG. 72) in which a specific position of a part of the LED is lit (different from the display mode showing the display probability setting value).

There is also a display mode in which the display probability set value is left as it is and at least one LED of a digit different from the digit that displays the display probability set value is made to emit light (FIG. 73).

In addition, during the setting change, information on the display probability setting value that the gaming control device 100 (FIG. 3) transmits (displays) to the performance display device 152 includes LEDs (segments a, b) that display the display probability setting value. , c, d, e, f, g) as well as the lighting pattern data for lighting the corresponding L.
Dot data (Dp) that lights up the dot-shaped LED (segment Dp) at the bottom right of the ED.
=1) (additional information) is included. Therefore, as intermediate data, a display mode in which all LEDs constituting the performance display device 152 including dots are turned off (FIG. 74), a segment Dp
There is also a display mode (FIG. 75) in which all other LEDs are turned off while keeping the LED on.

By the way, the game control device 100 transmits the information of the work setting value (probability setting value) after the setting change to the production control device 300 (FIG. 4) (FIG. 6B, A1044), and transmits this to the production control device 30.
0 is received (FIG. 50, B1323) and can be used as a performance setting value (performance setting value). Then, the production control device 300, as shown in FIG.
” to “5”, the effect control information “1” to “6” are provided as effect setting values.
Here, the effect control device 300 can make the effect different contents based on the effect control information "1" to "6" as effect setting values. For example, in the variable performance setting process of FIG. 55, the performance content is set based on the set value. Thereby, the interest in the gaming machine 10 can be improved by changing the performance control information each time the probability setting value is changed to give variation to the performance.

[Display example of performance display device]
FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The intermediate data in FIG.
It has a display mode in which all D lights are turned off.

In addition, the probability setting value display data includes the character "S" in digit 3 and "S" in digit 2 of the performance display device 152.
The LED lights so that the character "E" appears, the character "T" appears in digit 1 (so that the character "SET" appears), and the current display probability setting value appears in digit 0. It has a display mode that In addition, the probability setting value display data is such that the LEDs of digits 1, 2, and 3 turn off, and the current display probability setting value appears in digit 0 (which may be displayed in other digits). L.E.
It is also possible to provide a display mode in which D lights up.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 on, the setting change mode (setting variable state) is entered. In this case, game control device 1
The probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c of ) is read out, and the character “S” is placed in digit 3 of the performance display device 152, the character “E” is placed in digit 2, and the character “E” is placed in digit 1.
The characters "T" appear respectively, the value "1" of one kind of display probability setting value is displayed in the digit 0, and the characters "SET1" are displayed as a whole. Note that when entering the setting variable state (setting change mode), the working setting value area (in the RAM 111c or register) contains a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 subtracted from the probability setting value). value) may be stored.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work setting value is changed (for example, from "0" to "1"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined period of time. Alternatively, a display mode may be adopted in which the display probability setting value "1" is temporarily turned off while "SET" remains lit.

After the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the characters "SET1" including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "1") are displayed (there is no change in appearance). will be lit and displayed.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work setting value changes (for example, "
1" to "2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined period of time.

After the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the characters "SET1" (there is no change in appearance) include the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2"). will be lit and displayed.

As described above, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the characters "SET1" including the display probability setting value "1" can be identified so that they are temporarily turned off and then turned on again. , when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the lights go out. Furthermore, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work setting values in the work setting value area are changed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the work setting values are changed to the last updated work settings. The corresponding probability settings are stored in the probability settings area.

FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 or setting example 3 of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment.

First, in FIG. 70, for convenience, we will consider the case where the display probability setting value is setting example 3 and the working setting value at the time of starting the setting change is "1".

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 on,
The performance display device 152 (digit 0) has a display probability setting value “1” corresponding to the work setting value “1”.
The characters "SET1" including "SET1" are displayed in a lit state.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work setting value is changed (“1”).
2), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined period of time.

After the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the characters "SET1" (no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2") are displayed. It will be displayed lit.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work setting value is changed (from "2" to "3"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined period of time.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the characters "SET2" including the display probability setting value "2" corresponding to the changed work setting value "3" are illuminated and displayed. This allows the worker to
By pressing the initialization switch 112, it can be visually confirmed that the display probability setting value has been changed from "1" to "2".

As described above, each time the worker presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability setting value changes (1→1→2→2→2→1→...) as the work setting value changes. At the same time, when the value of the display probability set value is changed, the light is temporarily turned off, and then the next display probability set value is displayed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the lights are turned off.

Next, in FIG. 70, for convenience, we will consider the case where the display probability setting value is setting example 4 and the work setting value at the time of starting the setting change is "0".

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 on,
The performance display device 152 (digit 0) has a display probability setting value “1” corresponding to the work setting value “0”.
The characters "SET1" including "SET1" are displayed in a lit state.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work setting value is changed (“0”).
to "1"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined period of time.

Then, after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the characters "SET1" (no change in appearance) that includes the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value "1" are lit up and displayed. Ru.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work setting value is changed (from "1" to "2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined period of time.

Then, after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the characters "SET2" including the changed display probability setting value "2" corresponding to the changed work setting value "2" are illuminated and displayed. Thereby, the operator can visually confirm that the display probability setting value has been changed from "1" to "2" by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112. After that, although not shown, the RAM initialization switch 112
When is pressed twice, the characters "SET3" including the display probability setting value "3" corresponding to the work setting value "4" are lit up and displayed.

As described above, each time the worker presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability setting value changes (1→1→2→2→3→3→1→...・) will be changed as follows. In addition, when the value of the display probability setting value is changed, all the LEDs are turned off for a predetermined period of time, and then the next display probability setting value is lit and displayed. Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the LEDs are turned off.

FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram showing a first modification example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The modifications described below will be explained using the second setting example, but are also applicable to the first setting example, the third setting example, and the fourth setting example.

In the first modification, the intermediate data is the performance display device 1, contrary to FIG. 69 (or FIG. 70).
All LEDs in digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 of 52 are lit (at least digit 3).
, digit 2, or digit 1). On the other hand, in the probability setting value display data, the LEDs are all turned off in digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 of the performance display device 152 (it may also be a mode in which the characters "SET" are displayed as described above), and in digit 0, the LEDs are all turned off. A display mode is provided in which an LED constituting the display of the display probability setting value is lit.

The display mode of the display probability setting value in the first modification changes in the same manner as in FIG. 70. On the other hand, R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is pressed, all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 are turned on for a predetermined time based on the intermediate data, and then the changed display probability setting value is displayed.

Therefore, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the probability setting value for displaying digit 0 disappears for a predetermined period of time, and instead, all the LEDs for digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 turn on. Lights up for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram showing a second modification example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The second modified example shown in FIG. 72 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is displayed in the same digit (digit 0) as the display probability setting value, and has a display mode different from the display probability setting value before change and the display probability setting value after change.

As shown in FIG. 72, the intermediate data has a display mode in which, for example, only the LED of digit 0 (segment g) is lit. In addition, in the second modified example, any display mode other than the display indicating the probability setting value for display can be applied. Further, other digits (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) may also be arbitrarily displayed using intermediate data.

Therefore, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the probability setting value for displaying digit 0 disappears for a predetermined period of time, and the LED at a specific position of digit 0 (for example, segment g) turns off instead.
lights up for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram showing a third modification example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The third modification shown in FIG. 73 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is also displayed in digits (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) different from the digit where the display probability setting value is displayed (digit 0), and in digit 0, the display probability setting value is displayed. The display is maintained. In other words, although the intermediate data as a whole is different from the display probability setting value before the change and the display probability setting value after the change, the digit that displays the display probability setting value is the same as the display probability setting value before the change. The display format is for sharing information.

In the third modification, the gaming control device 100 combines the information of the display probability setting value (digit 0) stored in the probability setting value display data area and the intermediate data (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1
) and sets the combined data (intermediate data) in the probability setting value display data area as probability setting value display data (executed in A2411 in FIG. 68).

As shown in FIG. 73, the intermediate data has a display mode in which all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 are lit, and the composite data has a display mode in which all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 are lit. LED
is lit, and an LED indicating the pre-change display probability setting value is lit at digit 0. In addition, the probability setting value display data shows the probability setting value lit in digit 0, digit 3 and digit 2.
, digit 1 has a display mode in which the light is turned off, but the characters "SET" may be displayed in the same manner as above.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 are lit for a predetermined period of time, and the lighting display of the display probability setting value is also maintained during that time.

FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram showing a fourth modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fourth modification shown in FIG. 74 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display based on the display probability setting value (additional information).

In the fourth modification, the gaming control device 100 has the RAM initialization switch 11 as described above.
2 and the setting key switch 93 and turn on the power to the gaming machine 10, the setting variable state (first state) is entered. At this time, the gaming control device 100 adds dot data (Dp=1) (additional information) to the probability setting value display data. This can indicate that the displayed probability setting value for display "1." is a provisional value that is currently being changed.

On the other hand, the intermediate data has a display mode in which all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off. Therefore, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the performance display device 152
, the LEDs display "SET" for digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1, and the probability setting value for displaying digit 0 is "1".
” and the LED (segment Dp) that displays the dot of digit 0 are turned off for a predetermined period of time.

Note that by turning off the setting key switch 93, the setting is completed (second state). At this time, the gaming control device 100 displays probability setting value display data (digit 3, digit 2, SET”
By setting the display probability setting value "1" after the setting change is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the display probability setting value "1" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then the display probability setting value "1" is set in the probability setting display data area. ” will turn off.

FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram showing a fifth modification example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fifth modification example shown in FIG. 75 transitions in the same manner as the display mode of the fourth modification example shown in FIG. 74 except for the display using intermediate data.

On the other hand, the intermediate data includes LEDs that display "SET" for digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1, and digit 0.
The LED that displays the display probability setting value turns off, and the dot data (Dp=1) (additional information)
A display mode is provided in which an LED (segment Dp) for displaying lights up. Therefore, RAM
Each time the initialization switch 112 is pressed, the LEDs that display the characters "SET" for digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 on the performance display device 152, and the LED that displays the display probability setting value for digit 0, turn off. , the LED (segment Dp) that displays the dot of digit 0 remains lit. Therefore, the display on the performance display device 152 responds to the operation, and it can be easily identified that the settings are being changed.

[Actions and effects of the second embodiment]
This embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) that can execute a game (a variable display game that displays identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition), and when the result of the game is a special result, In a gaming machine 10 that can generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
Settings can be made by using a setting changing means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting key switch 93) that can change setting values (work setting values, probability setting values) according to game settings, and by lighting a light emitting member (LED). A display section (performance display device 152) capable of displaying information regarding the value (information corresponding to the jackpot probability, probability setting value for display), and the setting changing means is configured to change the setting value (
The game control means (game control device 100) includes a first switch (RAM initialization switch 112) for changing the work setting value), and the game control means (game control device 100)
In response to the operation 2), the setting value (work setting value) can be changed, and information regarding the changed setting value (probability setting value for display) can be displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152). When changing a value (work setting value), intermediate information (intermediate data )
is displayed on the display section (performance display device 152), and then information regarding the changed setting value (probability setting value for display) is displayed on the display section (performance display device 152).

With the above configuration, before and after changing the probability setting value, intermediate data is temporarily displayed in a different display format from the information about the setting value before and after the change (probability setting value for display), so the operator can It is possible to identify whether the display on the display section (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation on the operation section (RAM initialization switch 112).

In the present embodiment, the information regarding the setting value (display probability setting value) is the same regardless of the setting value (work setting value), and is information corresponding to the probability value that the game has a special result.

In the above configuration, the information regarding the setting value (probability setting value for display) is not changed before and after pressing the operating section (RAM initialization switch 112), but since the intermediate data is displayed, the operating section (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed. The display unit (performance display device 15)
2) It is possible to identify whether the display is responsive or not.

The present embodiment is characterized in that the intermediate information (intermediate data) is information that turns off all the light emitting members (LEDs) or information that turns on all the light emitting members.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily identify a change from information regarding the setting value before the change (probability setting value for display) to information regarding the setting value after the change (probability setting value for display).

In this embodiment, the display section (performance display device 152) has a plurality of digits, and has intermediate information (
(intermediate data) is displayed in a different digit from the digit that displays information regarding the setting value (probability setting value for display).

With the above configuration, it is shown that the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation by displaying intermediate data, and information regarding the setting value (probability setting value for display) is not erased. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the probability setting value).

In this embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) displays information regarding the setting value (probability setting value for display) and additional information (Dp=
1) can be displayed, and the setting change means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting key switch 93) is configured to change the setting value (work setting value) to a setting variable state in which the setting value (work setting value) can be changed. The second switch (setting key switch 93) has a first state that allows transition to a variable setting state and a second state that ends the variable setting state. The state is variable, and the game control means (game control device 100) transmits (displays) additional information (Dp=1) together with information regarding the setting value (probability setting value for display) when in the first state, In the second state, transmission (display) of additional information is stopped (dot data (Dp
= 0)), and the intermediate information (intermediate data) is additional information (dot data (Dp = 1))
includes.

With the above configuration, even if the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed while changing the settings, the LED (segment Dp) indicating that the settings are being changed remains lit without turning off. The reliability of the display can be increased.

In this embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 30
0), the performance control means (performance control device 300) controls the performance based on the setting value (work setting value), and the game control means (game control device 100) controls the changed setting value ( Information on final work setting values, probability setting values) is transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300).

With the above configuration, it is possible to execute a performance corresponding to the changed set value, so that the interest in the gaming machine 10 can be improved by providing variation to the performance.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. Note that configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Furthermore, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to receiving input in a setting change state.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
First, probability setting change/confirmation processing according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing according to the third embodiment.

The probability setting change/confirmation process according to the third embodiment includes the probability setting change/confirmation process according to the first embodiment.
In addition to the confirmation process, processes A2601 and A2602 are added.

After performing the processes from step A2401 to step A2410 as described above in the probability setting change/confirmation process according to the first embodiment, the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to a predetermined switch (A2601 ). The inputs of the predetermined switches are, for example, the starting port switches (starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a), gate switch 34a, and winning port switches 35a to 35n. In addition, for the input of the predetermined switch, an interface chip (proximity I/F )12
1 may be included (see FIG. 3).

If there is an input to the predetermined switch (the result of A2601 is "Y"), the gaming control device 1
00 executes the process corresponding to the switch input (A2602) and ends the probability setting change/confirmation process.

In the process corresponding to the switch input (A2602), the game control device 100 transmits a switch input command indicating that there is a switch input to the production control device 300. In addition, the production control device 300 receives a switch input command from the gaming control device 100 through the processing of step B3302 of the single-shot command processing described later, thereby lighting up the starting port LED, etc. Similarly, the game control device 100 has a second driver 138b and a third driver 138.
An on/off drive signal may be outputted to the collective display device 50 via c to cause the collective display device 50 to light up.

On the other hand, if there is no input to the predetermined switch (the result of A2601 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 ends the probability setting change/confirmation process.

[Single command processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of one-shot command processing according to the third embodiment.

The one-shot command processing according to the third embodiment includes the processing of B3301 and B3302 in addition to the one-shot command processing according to the first embodiment.

After performing the processing from step B1301 to step B1327 as described above in the single-shot command processing according to the first embodiment, the production control device 300 executes (B1327) if the MODE section does not represent a setting confirmation command. (the result is "N"), it is determined whether the MODE section is within the range of the switch input command (B3301). When the MODE section is within the range of the switch input command, the production control device 300 has received the switch input command from the gaming control device 100, and determines that there is a switch input.

If the MODE section represents a switch input command (the result of B3301 is "Y"), the production control device 300 executes the switch input process (B3302), and then ends the one-shot command process.

In the switch input process (B3302), the production control device 300 lights up the starting port LED or displays a check item on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving the switch input command. When the production control device 300 receives a switch input command, it sequentially lights up the decorative LEDs, and lights up the movable accessories and the speakers 19 (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 1).
9b) may be operated.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a switch input command (the result of B3301 is "N"), the production control device 300 executes steps B1329 and subsequent steps as described above in the single-shot command processing according to the first embodiment. Proceed with the process.

[Hall/player setting mode processing]
Referring to FIG. 78, details of the hole/player setting mode process (B0011) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of hall/player setting mode processing according to the third embodiment. The hall/player setting mode process starts a hall setting mode in which the person in charge of the hall (gaming parlor) can make various settings for the gaming machine 10, or a player setting mode in which the player can make various settings for the gaming machine 10. be able to.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the hall setting mode (B0401
). If a hole setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is in progress. When in hole setting mode (result of B0401 is "Y"), B0
After processing 406-B0416, the performance button 25 (
Various settings and adjustments are made based on the operations of the production button switch 25a and the touch panel 25b.

When the production control device 300 is not in the hall setting mode (the result of B0401 is "N"
), it is determined whether the player setting mode is in progress (B0402). If a player setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is in effect. If the player is in the player setting mode (result of B0402 is "Y"), the processes of B0420 to B0425 are performed to perform various settings and adjustments based on the operation of the performance button 25 by the player.

If the production control device 300 is not in the player setting mode (the result of B0402 is “N”)
), it is determined whether the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0403). For example, when the operation of the effect button 25 to enter the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for customers or changing settings, the condition for starting the hall setting mode is established. It can be determined that Waiting for a customer is, for example, a state in which a video for waiting for a customer (a customer waiting demonstration) is displayed on the display device 41. In addition, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened during the setting change state (when an error/invalid command related to the front frame opening error is received (B1316)), the production button input process (B0010 )
The hall setting mode may be entered when the operation of the production button 25 is detected as an operation signal. If the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0403 is "N"), the process of B0417 is executed.

When the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0403 is "Y"), the production control device 300 performs screen drawing for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hole setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hole setting mode. Perform start settings (B0404). Then, a hole setting mode flag is set (B0405).

Next, the performance control device 300 performs hall volume adjustment processing (
B0406), Hall LED brightness adjustment processing (B0407) that adjusts and sets the brightness of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46, LCD brightness that adjusts and sets the brightness of the display section (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41 Adjustment processing (B0408) and power saving setting processing (B0409) for setting power saving are executed. Setting values regarding the volume of the speaker, brightness of the LED, brightness of the display device 41, and setting values regarding power saving settings are set values in the hall setting mode.

Next, the production control device 300 executes a logo color setting process to set the issuing color of the logo accessory (B0410). Then, it is determined whether there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0411
). The operation signal from the setting confirmation operation of the production button 25 is processed by the production button input process (B0010)
If it is detected, it can be determined that a setting confirmation operation input has been made. If there is no setting confirmation operation input (result of B0411 is "N"), the hole/player setting mode processing is ended.

When there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0411 is “Y”), the production control device 300
), it is determined whether the factory settings have been finalized (B0412). If there is no operation of the production button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the factory settings have been confirmed. If the factory settings are not confirmed (the result of B0412 is "N"), the process proceeds to B0414. If the factory settings are confirmed (the result of B0412 is "Y"), a factory settings process is executed to perform various settings and adjustments using the factory settings (B0413). The factory settings are default settings stored in a memory such as the ROM 321. Next, the hall setting data (or hall adjustment data) such as the volume and various brightnesses determined in B0406-B0410 and B0413 are written into a backup memory (for example, FeRAM 323) (B0414).

Next, the production control device 300 performs a screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B0415). Then, the hole setting mode flag is cleared (B0416).

When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied, the production control device 300 (B040
3), it is determined whether the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0417
). When the operation of the performance button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the performance button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer, it can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied. If the conditions for starting player setting mode are not met (B
If the result of 0417 is "N"), the hall/player setting mode processing is ended.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0417 is "Y"), the production control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting to start screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B0418). Then, a player setting mode flag is set (B0419).

Next, the production control device 300 performs a player volume adjustment process (B0420) that adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the production button 25 by the player, and the frame decoration device 18 and board decoration. A player LED brightness adjustment process (B0421) for adjusting the brightness of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a performance customization process (described later) that customizes the performance (individual setting) based on the operation of the performance button 25 etc. by the player (B0422).
Then, it is determined whether there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0423). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (result of B0423 is "N"), the hole/player setting mode processing is ended.
If there is a setting confirmation operation input (result of B0423 is "Y"), perform screen drawing end setting to end screen drawing on the display device 41 in player setting mode (B042
4). Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B0425). In addition, B042
Player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as volume and brightness determined in 0-B0421 may be deleted, so it is not written to the backup memory.

In addition, in the above, once the hole setting mode or player setting mode is entered, the drawing update setting (updating highlight items in the menu display, etc.) is performed using the production button input process (B
0010).

[Game board whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 79 is a front view of the game board 30 in a setting change state according to the third embodiment.

In the game board 30 (including the center case 40) according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. They are provided in front of and in front of the general prize opening 35, respectively. The LED provided in front of the normal figure starting gate 34 is the normal figure starting gate LED 34L, and the LED provided in front of each general winning opening 35 is the general winning opening LED 35L.

When the production control device 300 according to the third embodiment enters the setting change state, it receives a command for changing the probability settings, and displays a message "Settings changing" on the display screen of the display device 41 indicating that the settings are being changed. Display characters (B1326, setting change information setting process).

Here, when the gaming control device 100 is in the setting change state (setting variable state, setting change mode), steps A2601 and A2 of the probability setting change/confirmation process are performed as described above with reference to FIG.
In the process of 602, the gate switch 34a which is an input different from the input related to changing the set value
It also functions as a control means that can accept input from the prize opening switches 35a to 35n.
And, the game control device 100 includes the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switches 35a to 35n.
When an input is received, a switch input command corresponding to the received input is transmitted to the production control device 300.

Then, the production control device 300 performs step B3301 of the single-shot command processing in FIG.
In the process of B3302, when a switch input command is received from the gaming control device 100, the LED of the board decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command (normal figure starting gate LED 34
L or general prize opening LED 35L) lights up or flashes.

Therefore, when the setting is changed, when a game ball passes through or enters the general winning opening gate 34 or each general winning opening 35, the corresponding ordinary opening gate LED 34L or general winning opening LED 35L lights up or blinks. The operation can be easily checked and the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved. As a result, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the gaming machine 10 at the time of shipment from the factory, for example, so that initially defective gaming machines 10 can be detected at an early stage.

Note that the production control device 300 controls the LE of the board decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command.
After turning on or blinking D (the regular figure starting gate LED 34L or the general winning hole LED 35L), other uncorresponding LEDs may be turned on or blinking in order. According to such an aspect, the operation of the LEDs of the various board decoration devices 46 can be easily checked by simply receiving any switch input command from the game control device 100, so that maintenance of the game machine 10 can be easily performed. can improve sex.

In addition, the game control device 100 includes a gate switch 34a and winning opening switches 35a to 35n.
In response to receiving the input from the display section 51 to 60 (LED
Lamp, special figure 1 display 51, special figure 2 display 52, regular figure display 53, special figure 1 pending indicator 54
, special figure 2 hold display 55, regular figure hold indicator 56, first game state display section 57, second game state display section 58, third game state display section 59, round display section 60) are lit or blinked as appropriate. You may let them. In addition, the gaming control device 100 turns on or blinks the display section (any one of the display sections 51 to 60) of the collective display device 50 corresponding to the received input, and then turns on or blinks the display section (any one of the display sections 51 to 60) of the collective display device 50 corresponding to the received input. It may be possible to check the operation of the entire display sections 51 to 60 of the collective display device 50 by lighting or blinking (processing in A2602). Further, the operation check of the entire display sections 51 to 60 of the collective display device 50 is not limited to the manner in which all of them are turned on or all of them blink, but may be a manner in which they are turned on in cycles so that it is easy to confirm that they are emitting light normally.

In addition, when the production control device 300 receives a switch input command from the gaming control device 100 and performs the switch input processing (B3302), as shown in FIG. 79, the display device 41
A checklist may be displayed on the display screen. In the check table, an indication that normal operation has been checked, such as "○", is displayed in the item of each switch corresponding to the received input.

In addition, the production control device 300, as shown in FIG. Normal operation has been checked for the opening 1 and starting opening 2 items (“○”)
may be displayed.

In addition, an LED (starting prize opening LED 36L) of the board decoration device 46 is provided in front of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1, first starting winning area), and the LED lights up according to the corresponding switch input command. Alternatively, it may be made to blink. Furthermore, the production control device 300,
Speaker 19 (upper speaker 1) is used as a production device according to the corresponding switch input command.
9a and lower speaker 19b) may be operated. At that time, for example, when the production control device 300 receives a switch input command corresponding to the gate switch 34a, it can give a voice notification of "Fuzu starting gate!", and when it receives a switch input command corresponding to the winning opening switches 35a to 35n. You can make a voice announcement saying "General prize opening!"

Furthermore, during the setting change, the gaming control device 100 receives a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 that is output when the front frame 12 etc. is open, and sends an error/illegal command to the production control device 300. When the production control device 300 receives the operation of the production button 25 during transmission, the production control device 300 determines that the process of step B0403 of the hall/player setting mode process has been completed as described above in FIG. Determine (result of B0403 is “Y”)
).

Therefore, since the production control device 300 executes the processing from step B0404 onward, it becomes possible to perform hole setting while changing settings. In this way, the game control device 100
functions as a control means that can accept a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 as an input different from the input related to changing the setting value when in the setting change state. Furthermore, by accepting the operation of the production button 25 with the front frame 12 etc. open, the production control device 300 receives an input related to the hole setting as an input different from an input related to changing the setting value during the setting change state, It functions as a control means that can change the set value of the hall setting (for example, the volume of the speaker, the brightness of the LED, etc.).

[Another example of a game board whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 80 is another example of a front view of the game board 30 during a setting change according to the third embodiment.

In the game board 30 of another example, as shown in FIG. The winning LED 38L and the second special variable winning LED 39L are also made to emit light. The normal figure variable winning LED 37L is an LED provided in front of the normal variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2, second starting winning opening). The first special variable winning LED 38L is an LED provided in front of the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning LED 39L is an LED provided in front of the second special variable winning device 39.

The normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning device 39 whose settings are being changed are closed by a sliding opening/closing type movable member 37b and attacker type opening/closing doors 38c, 39c, respectively.

Therefore, the production control device 300 lights up or blinks the regular variable winning LED 37L, the first special variable winning LED 38L, and the second special variable winning LED 39L in response to the pressing of the production button 25 etc. while changing settings, for example. can be done. In addition, the general figure variable winning LED3
7L, the first special variable winning LED 38L, and the second special variable winning LED 39L may be turned on in sequence or at the same time.

In addition, when there is an input to a predetermined switch (the result of A2601 is "Y"), the game control device 100 opens the movable member 37b and the opening/closing doors 38c and 39c, and opens the normal variable winning device 37 and the The first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 may be placed in a state where game balls can be directly won.

Furthermore, in the game board 30 of another example, the performance control device 300 can cause the upper performance unit LED40cL and the side performance unit LED40dL, which are the LEDs of the board decoration device 46, to emit light. The upper production unit LED40cL is an L provided in the upper production unit 40c.
It is ED. The side effect unit LED 40dL is an LED provided on the blade of the sword held by the character of the side effect unit 40d. The production control device 300 lights or blinks the upper production unit LED 40cL and the side production unit LED 40dL, for example, in response to the production button 25 being pressed during setting change. In addition, the upper production unit LED
40cL and the side effect unit LED 40dL may be turned on in sequence or at the same time.

In this way, by lighting up the LED of the accessory (decorative member) in addition to the LED of the winning opening and the winning device, the operation of the LED of the accessory (decorative member) can be easily checked. Maintainability can be improved. In addition, maintainability may be further improved by moving a movable accessory or the like as a performance device when emitting light so that it can be confirmed whether the motor of the movable accessory or the like operates normally.

In addition, the performance control device 300 also controls a lamp display device 80 (lamp display unit 1 to
6 (LED)) may be combined to emit light.

[Actions and effects of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment has identification information (identification information, decorative special symbols, decorative first symbols A to
C. When the stop result of a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays the main special figure) becomes a special result (jackpot result), a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player is generated. It is possible. The game machine 10 includes control means (game control device 100,
A performance control device 300) and a setting change means (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112) that can change setting values related to game conditions. When the control means is in a setting change state (setting variable state, setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed by the setting change means, it is possible to receive an input different from an input related to changing the setting value.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value is in the setting change state where the setting value can be changed, the control means can accept inputs related to management and maintenance of the gaming machine 10, such as hole setting and operation check. The manageability and maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the control means (gaming control device 100, performance control device 300) receives a predetermined input (front frame opening) as an input different from the input related to changing the setting value during the setting change state. When receiving a signal from the detection switch 64 and a signal from the production button 25, it is possible to change not only the set value but also a set value different from the set value (set value in the hall setting) during the setting change state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when in the setting change state, the setting values of the hall settings etc. can be changed as setting values different from the setting values related to the gaming conditions, so that the person in charge of the gaming hall (gaming parlor) It is possible to improve the maintainability. In addition, since the setting change state is normally entered by the operation of the person in charge of the gaming hall (gaming parlor), by making it possible to change the setting values of the hall settings while in the setting change state, the It is possible to prevent the setting values of the hole settings from being changed unnecessarily by a person who is not the person in charge of the hall setting.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment has a light emitting device (LED of the board decoration device 46) that can emit light.
In particular, in addition to the LEDs in front of the first starting prize opening 36 and the second starting winning opening), the collective display device 50
display units 51 to 60), a predetermined area provided in the game area 32 and into which a game ball can enter or pass, and a detection means capable of detecting entry or passage of a game ball into the predetermined area. . When the control means (gaming control device 100, performance control device 300) receives an input from the detection means as a different input, it causes the light emitting device to emit light.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the settings are changed, the operation can be easily checked to see that the various detection means can normally detect the game ball and that the various light emitting devices emit light normally. The maintainability of the machine 10 can be improved.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, a plurality of light emitting devices (effect devices such as LEDs of the board decoration device 46) are provided. The control means (gaming control device 100, production control device 300) is
During the setting change state, the display of the plurality of light emitting devices can be sequentially changed to a predetermined display mode (e.g., light emission).

According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, by simply receiving any switch input command from the gaming control device 100, the performance control device 300 can control various light emitting devices (board decoration device 46) during the setting change state. Since the operation of the LEDs, performance devices) can be easily checked, the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with performance devices (display device 41, board decoration device 46, lamp display device 80, etc.) capable of displaying a display related to the performance, and a game ball provided in the game area 32. A predetermined area where the ball can enter or pass (normal figure starting gate 34, each general winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area), second starting winning opening of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) (winning area), etc.) and detection means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switches 35a to 35n, starting opening switch, etc.) capable of detecting entry or passage of a game ball into a predetermined area. When the control means receives an input from the detection means as a different input, it can change the display of the performance device to a predetermined display mode (LED light emission, normal operation checked display on a check list).

According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, when the setting is changed, a game ball passes through or enters the normal pattern start gate 34, each general winning hole 35, etc. as a predetermined area, and the corresponding normal pattern is changed. Since the starting gate LED 34L and the general winning hole LED 35L can be turned on or blinking, and a check list of passing or entering balls can be displayed on the display device 41, operation can be easily checked and the maintainability of the game machine 10 can be improved. I can do it. As a result, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the gaming machine 10 at the time of shipment from the factory, for example, so that initially defective gaming machines 10 can be detected at an early stage.

In addition, the game machine 10 of the third embodiment includes performance devices that can perform performances (in addition to the display device 41, the LED of the board decoration device 46, the speaker 19, and the upper part of the board performance device 44 (movable accessories, etc.). unit 40c, side effect unit 40d, etc.). Control means (production control device 300
) can operate the production device when the setting is changed.

According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, the LED of the board decoration device 46 is used as a performance device.
In addition to the light emission, a sound is announced from the speaker 19, and by moving a movable accessory as a production device when the light is emitted, when the settings are being changed, the operation of the LED of the board production device 44 is checked and the speaker It is also possible to easily check the operation of the motors of the motors 19, movable accessories, etc., and the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be further improved.

[Fourth embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. Note that configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to third embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments,
The same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those in the first to third embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate in the description. The fourth embodiment relates to the operation of the gaming machine 10 when a power outage occurs during the special gaming state and the power is restored.

[Timing chart during special game state of normal operation]
First, with reference to FIG. 81, the timing of signal output, etc. in the special game state of normal operation in the fourth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. in the special game state of normal operation according to the fourth embodiment.

First, as shown in FIG. 81, at time t1, when the first jackpot (special game state) occurs, external information is For example, a jackpot 1 signal and a jackpot 2 signal are output as signals related to the start of the jackpot (special game state) saved in the output data area. This signal regarding the start of the jackpot is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and further to an external device (such as a hall computer). Specifically, the output of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is started when the stop result (display result) of the variable display game becomes a jackpot result (special result). In addition, the gaming machine 10
remains powered on and the security signal is off.

If the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot, the jackpot 1 signal is processed during the special figure 1 display (Figure 37
) is saved in the external information output data area in the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (A5714), or if the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot, the fanfare/interval process transition process (Figure 38) is saved. It is saved in the external information output data area in the interval process transition setting process (A5816). The jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area in step A5709 of the special figure 1 display processing (Figure 37) if the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot, or if the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot. In this case, special figure 2 display processing (Fig. 38
) is saved in the external information output data area in step A5811.

When the first jackpot ends at time t2, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned off. Specifically, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is caused by the end of the special game state, that is, the signal related to the end of the jackpot being saved in the external information output data area by the jackpot end processing after the round game (FIGS. 40 and 41). And it turns off. On the other hand, after the first jackpot is over, it is in a time-saving state (general power support state, specific gaming state) or variable probability state (specific gaming state, probability variable state), and the output of the jackpot 2 signal remains on. be done.

Specifically, if the off data of the jackpot 1 signal is the end of the jackpot due to the special chart 1 variable display game, step A6112 of the special chart 1 jackpot end process (FIG. 40) is executed to turn off the jackpot 1 signal. is saved in the external information output data area. In addition, if the off data of the jackpot 1 signal is the end of the jackpot due to the special figure 2 variable display game, in order to turn off the jackpot 1 signal, external information is Saved in the output data area.

If the jackpot 2 signal is in the time saving state after the jackpot ends, it is saved in the external information output data area in step A6501 of the jackpot end setting process 2 and continues to be output (on state).
In addition, if the jackpot 2 signal is in a variable state after the jackpot ends, the jackpot end setting process 3
In step A6801, the information is saved in the external information output data area, and the output (on state) continues.

Subsequently, at time t3, when the jackpot occurs again, that is, the second jackpot occurs, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned on.

Then, at time t4, when the second jackpot ends, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned off. In addition, the second jackpot corresponds to a normal jackpot symbol (for example, 10R normal jackpot symbol), and the time reduction judgment data is data with time reduction, and there is no specific area passage information (
If the result of A6104 is "N" (no V winning), jackpot end setting process 2 is executed (A6
103). Therefore, after the end of the second jackpot, the time saving state (general power support state) will occur.

After that, at time t5, when the variable display game in the time saving state reaches, for example, 100 times after the second jackpot ends, the remaining number of games in the time saving state (the number of times of time saving fluctuations) becomes 0, and the time saving state ends. do. At this time, the output of the jackpot 2 signal is turned off by saving the off data of the jackpot 2 signal in the external information output data area in step A5105 of the time reduction variation number update process. Further, when a game including a special game state etc. is being played in the normal operation as described above, the power of the gaming machine 10 is maintained in the on state and the security signal remains off.

Note that, unlike the above, if the variable probability state is entered after the second jackpot ends, the variable probability state ends when the player wins the lottery in the falling lottery process (Figure 20), and at that time, the output of the jackpot 2 signal is , the off data of the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area (
A3704), it turns off.

[Timing chart for normal recovery after power outage during special gaming state]
Referring to FIG. 82, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output, etc. when a power outage occurs during the special game state and the power is restored to normality will be explained. FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when a power outage occurs during the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment and normal recovery is restored by power restoration. Note that in FIGS. 82 to 86 below, descriptions will be omitted as appropriate for contents that overlap with those described in FIG. 81 and the like.

At time t1, as in FIG. 81 described above, when the first jackpot (special gaming state) occurs, a jackpot 1 signal and a jackpot 2 signal are output. Further, the security signal is maintained in an off state.

At time t11, when a power outage occurs during the first jackpot (for example, during a round game), as shown in FIG.
As shown in 2, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off and the jackpot game is interrupted. Further, as the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t12, when the power is restored (recovery from power outage) and the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the gaming machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power outage by the main processing power outage recovery process (A1045). The output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is saved (memorized) in the RAM at the time of power outage (A1057, A1058), and the gaming control device 100 outputs the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal when the power is restored. Save data (stored information) regarding the output state, that is, the jackpot state is held (maintained) internally. Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal, which were in the on state before the power outage, are turned on, and the first jackpot game is restarted.

When the first jackpot ends at time t13, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the first jackpot ends, the game is in a time saving state (general power support state) or a variable probability state (specific game state, probability variable state), and the output of the jackpot 2 signal remains on.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second jackpot from time t14 to time t16 is as follows:
The signal output is similar to the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above in FIG. 81.

In addition, when a power outage occurs during the second jackpot, time saving state, or variable probability state, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are similarly turned off. When the power is restored and the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the gaming machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power outage by the power outage recovery process (A1045) of the main process, and resumes the second jackpot, time saving state, or variable probability state. can do.

[Timing chart when memory error occurs after power outage during special gaming state]
Referring to FIG. 83, the timing of signal output, etc. when a power outage occurs during the special game state and a memory abnormality occurs upon power restoration in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 shows the fourth
It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when a power outage occurs during the special game state according to the embodiment and a memory abnormality occurs when the power is restored.

At time t1, the first jackpot (special gaming state) occurs and the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are output, as in the case of FIG. When this occurs, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off and the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t22, when the power is restored and the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the RAM (here, the RAM
When a memory abnormality occurs in M111c), the output of the security signal is turned on. Specifically, when it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is set in the main process (A102
2), the security signal on data is output (A1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal (
A1026). In addition, while the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated and the process is on standby, interrupts remain prohibited (A1001), and a timer interrupt process that allows execution of special map 1 and 2 game processing and general map game processing is performed. (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, so the games (special pattern fluctuation display game, regular pattern fluctuation display game) cannot be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud due to RAM abnormality from being reflected in the game.

In addition, the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal saved (stored) as save data (stored information) in the RAM during a power outage is read in the power outage recovery process when the power is restored. Therefore, at the time of normal recovery, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal can be output as shown by broken lines in FIG. 83. However, since a memory error has occurred in the RAM, the gaming control device 100 turns on the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 83, while holding the jackpot 1 signal as shown by the broken line in FIG. And the jackpot 2 signal is not output.

After that, at time t23, the power is turned off once, and when it is determined that the setting key switch 93 (setting key) and the RAM initialization switch 112 are pressed (on) when the power is turned on again (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the state shifts to a setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state), the probability setting value is cleared due to the RAM abnormality (A1028), and the security signal is turned on (A1034). Then, the setting key switch 93 is turned off (A1036
When the result of ``Y'') and the setting change state is completed, the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (RAM clear) (A1042), and initialized (A1043, A1044).
Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Furthermore, the memory abnormality of the gaming machine 10 is resolved. On the other hand, the jackpot state is also reset, the gaming machine 10 enters the normal gaming state, and the stopped symbols also become lost symbols.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the second jackpot, time saving state, or variable probability state, a memory error will occur, the RAM will be cleared and initialized, and the gaming machine 10 will return to the normal gaming state. Become.

[Timing chart when transitioning to setting confirmation state after power outage during special game state]
Referring to FIG. 84, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output, etc. when a power outage occurs during the special gaming state, normality is restored upon power restoration, and the transition to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) will be explained. do. FIG. 84 shows that a power outage occurs during the special game state according to the fourth embodiment,
12 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when normal recovery occurs upon power restoration and transition to a setting confirmation state.

After the first jackpot occurs at time t1 and the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are output as in the case of FIG.
When the power is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t32, when the power is restored and the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 turned on (the RAM initialization switch 112 is off), the probability setting confirmation flag is set. (A1032), and the gaming machine 10 shifts to a setting confirmation state in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be confirmed (A1305).

When the setting confirmation state is entered at time t32, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 84 (A2406). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by solid lines in FIG. 83 (A2406).

As described above with reference to FIG. 83, the output states (ON state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are saved in the RAM at the time of power outage (A1057, A1058), and even when the power is restored, the output states (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are
4, save data regarding the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is held.

Then, at time t33, the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned off (A1036
If the result is "Y"), the power outage recovery process is performed (A1045), and the security signal is turned off.

In addition, the output states of the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal that were saved (memorized) as save data (memory information) in RAM during a power outage are read in the power outage recovery process and turned on after the setting confirmation state is completed. Become. Therefore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the first jackpot game is restarted. Then, the same number of rounds as the jackpot game (special game) during normal operation without a power outage are played over the same amount of time.

When the first jackpot ends at time t34, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the first jackpot ends, the game is in a time saving state (general power support state) or a variable probability state (specific game state, probability variable state), and the output of the jackpot 2 signal remains on.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second jackpot from time t35 to time t36 is as follows:
The signal output is similar to the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above in FIG. 81.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during the second jackpot, time saving state, or variable probability state, and the power is restored and the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, when the setting confirmation state ends, the power outage recovery process (A1
045), the gaming machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power outage, and can resume the second jackpot, time saving state, or variable probability state.

[Timing chart when transitioning to setting change state after power outage in special game state]
Referring to FIG. 85, in the fourth embodiment, a power outage occurs during the special game state, and when the power is restored, the normal state is restored and the state is changed to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state). Signal output, etc. The timing will be explained. FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when a power outage occurs during the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal, and the state is shifted to the setting change state.

After the first jackpot occurs at time t1 and the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are output as in FIG. 81 etc. described above, when a power outage occurs during the first jackpot at time t41, the gaming machine
When the power is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t42, when the power is restored and the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 pressed (on), the probability setting is changed. The medium flag is set (A1029), and the gaming machine 10 shifts to a setting change state in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (A1305).

When the setting change state is entered at time t42, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 85 (A2406). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by solid lines in FIG. 85 (A2406).

As described above with reference to FIG. 83, the output states (ON state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are saved in the RAM at the time of power outage (A1057, A1058), and even when the power is restored, the output states (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are
As shown by broken lines in 5, save data regarding the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is held.

Then, at time t43, when the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned off (A10
36 result is "Y"), and the probability setting changing flag is set (A1040
The result is "Y"), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (RAM clear) (
A1042) and are initialized (A1043, A1044). Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Therefore, when the setting change state is completed, the gaming machine 10 is restored to normal condition, but the RAM is cleared and the jackpot state is reset to the normal gaming state, and the stopped symbols also become lost symbols.

In addition, even if a power outage occurs during the second jackpot, time saving state, or variable probability state, when the setting change state is finished, the RAM is cleared and initialized, and the gaming machine 10 returns to the normal gaming state. becomes.

[Timing chart when the power is turned off in the setting change state after a power outage in the special game state]
Referring to FIG. 86, in the fourth embodiment, a power outage occurs during the special game state, the power is restored to normal when the power is restored, the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) is entered, and then the power is turned off. The timing of signal output, etc. when this is done will be explained. FIG. 86 shows an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when a power outage occurs during the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal when the power is restored, the setting change state is entered, and then the power is turned off. FIG.

The signal output when the power is interrupted after the occurrence of the first jackpot from time t1 to time t52 and is restored in a setting change state is the same as the signal output from time t1 to time t42 described above in FIG. 85. Note that when transitioning to the setting change state at time t52, at time t42 in FIG.
Similarly, the probability setting changing flag is set (A1029).

Thereafter, at time t53, when the power is turned off while in the setting change state (or when there is another power outage), the output of the security signal is turned off. In addition, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 85, like the broken lines up to FIG. 84, save data regarding the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is held. Furthermore, since the saved data saved in the RAM cannot be read when the power is turned off, the broken lines of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal when the power is turned off are set as OFF. Note that the probability setting changing flag remains set (A10
37 results are “Y”, A1057, A1058).

At time t54, the RAM initialization switch 112 is not turned on (A1021
The result of A1023 is "N"), and when the power is turned on, since the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is "Y"), the ON data of the security signal is output (A
1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by solid lines in FIG. 86 (A1026). Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are in the output state (
(on state) is maintained, but is not output. Also, steps A1025 and A
While waiting by repeating the process of 1026, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, so the games (special pattern variation display game, regular pattern variation display game) cannot be executed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent unexpected processing (processing in which power is restored after a power outage in a setting change state) from being reflected in the game. Thereafter, by clearing the RAM as at time t23 in FIG. 83 (A1042), normal recovery can be achieved, and at this time, the jackpot state is reset.

[Actions and effects of the fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment has a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result (stop result) of a game (for example, a special figure variable display game, a variable display game) becomes a special result (jackpot result). A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating (jackpot game state) is provided. The gaming machine 10 includes a holding storage means (RAM of the gaming control device 100) in which information regarding games is stored, and the stored information can be stored and retained even if a power outage occurs. The control means is capable of outputting a signal (one jackpot signal) upon the occurrence of a special gaming state, and is capable of outputting a signal (one jackpot signal) during the restart process when power is restored after a power outage occurs during the special gaming state. When an abnormality in the information recorded in the storage means is detected, a security signal is output to notify the abnormality, and a signal (Jackpot 1
signal) is not output.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when an abnormality in information recorded in the holding storage means is detected during restart processing when power is restored after a power outage occurs while a special gaming state is occurring, does not output the signal (jackpot 1 signal) that is output when a special gaming state occurs, but instead outputs a security signal, so it can notify that fraud has been committed against the gaming machine when the power is restored. .
By reporting the fraud, the person in charge of the gaming hall (gaming parlor) can take countermeasures against the fraud.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes setting changing means (gaming control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) that can change setting values (probability setting values) related to gaming conditions. The control means (gaming control device 100) can output a signal (jackpot 1 signal) upon the occurrence of a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state), and after a power outage occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state, the set value During the restart process when the power is restored after a power outage in the changeable setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state), a security signal is output to notify of an abnormality, and a signal (jackpot 1 signal) is generated. is not output.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the signal (jackpot 1 signal) that is output in response to the occurrence of the special gaming state is not output during the restart process when the power is restored after a power outage in the setting change state. Since the security signal is output, it is possible to notify that an unexpected process is being performed on the gaming machine in the setting change state. By this notification, the person in charge of the game parlor (gaming parlor) can take a response to the fact that unexpected processing (processing in which power is restored after a power outage in a setting change state) has been performed on the gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment provides a special advantageous effect for the player when the result (stop result) of the game (for example, special figure variable display game, variable display game) becomes a special result (jackpot result). It includes a control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a gaming state (jackpot gaming state) and a specific gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state). The gaming machine 10 has a holding storage means (game control device 10
0 RAM). The control means generates a signal (jackpot 2 signal) upon occurrence of a special gaming state.
The signal can be output until the specific gaming state after the special gaming state ends, and the signal can be output again when the power is restored after a power outage occurs during the special gaming state or the specific gaming state. If an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding storage means is detected during the activation process, a security signal is output to notify the abnormality, and no signal (jackpot 2 signal) is output.

According to such a gaming machine 10, after a power outage occurs while a special gaming state or a specific gaming state is occurring, an abnormality in information recorded in the holding storage means is detected during restart processing when power is restored. If detected, the signal that is output when a special gaming state occurs (Jackpot 2 signal) is not output, but a security signal is output, so when the power is restored, it is possible that fraud has been committed against the gaming machine. I can inform you about things. By reporting the fraud, the person in charge of the gaming hall (gaming parlor) can take countermeasures against the fraud.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes setting changing means (gaming control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) that can change setting values (probability setting values) related to gaming conditions. The control means (gaming control device 100) can start outputting a signal (jackpot 2 signal) upon the occurrence of a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state), and can start outputting a signal (jackpot 2 signal) after the special gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state). A setting change state (in which the signal can be outputted until the end of the specified game state) and the set value can be changed after a power outage occurs during the special game state or the specific game state (
During restart processing when the power is restored after a power outage in setting change mode, setting variable state), a security signal is output to notify of an abnormality, and a signal (jackpot 2 signal) is not output.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the signal (jackpot 2 signal) that is output in response to the occurrence of the special gaming state is not output during the restart process when the power is restored after a power outage in the setting change state. Since the security signal is output, it is possible to notify that an unexpected process is being performed on the gaming machine in the setting change state. By this notification, the person in charge of the game parlor (gaming parlor) can take a response to the fact that unexpected processing (processing in which power is restored after a power outage in a setting change state) has been performed on the gaming machine.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, it is also possible to combine multiple embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can also be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and content equivalent to the claims are included.

10 Game machine 12 Front frame (game frame)
25 Production button 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 1st starting prize opening (1st starting winning area)
37 Normal variable winning device 38 First special variable winning device 39 Second special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board presentation device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
93 Setting key switch 100 Game control device (main board)
112 RAM initialization switch 152 Performance display device 200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub board)
400 Power supply device

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with a control means capable of executing a game and generating a special gaming state and a specific gaming state advantageous to the player,
comprising a storage means that stores information regarding the game and is capable of retaining the stored information even if a power outage occurs;
The storage means includes a storage area that is subject to validity determination of stored information and a storage area that is not subject to validity determination of stored information,
The control means includes:
It is possible to start outputting a signal upon the occurrence of the special gaming state, and output the signal until the specific gaming state after the special gaming state ends;
In response to multiple events that may occur in the gaming machine, it is possible to output a security signal that notifies the occurrence of the event,
When there is a power outage during the special gaming state or the specific gaming state and the power is restored, the validity of the information stored in the storage area that is not subject to the validity determination is not determined and the validity determination is made. determine the validity of the information stored in the storage area , and if the result of the validity determination is abnormal, output the security signal to notify the abnormality, and do not output the signal. A gaming machine featuring:

Images